Commit Graph

3817 Commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
Robert Haas
7a6b017b34 Rename pg_validatebackup to pg_verifybackup some more.
The previous commit missed an instance.

Noriyoshi Shinoda

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/TU4PR8401MB115291AE850BA7CF1AEB2F0BEEDD0@TU4PR8401MB1152.NAMPRD84.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
2020-04-13 10:51:40 -04:00
Amit Kapila
ef08ca113f Cosmetic fixups for WAL usage work.
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby and Euler Taveira
Author: Justin Pryzby and Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-13 15:31:16 +05:30
Robert Haas
dbc60c5593 Rename pg_validatebackup to pg_verifybackup.
Also, use "verify" rather than "validate" to refer to the process
being undertaken here. Per discussion, that is a more appropriate
term.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/172c9d9b-1d0a-1b94-1456-376b1e017322@2ndquadrant.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobLgMh6p8FmLbj_rv9Uhd7tPrLnAyLgGd2SoSj=qD-bVg@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-12 11:26:05 -04:00
Tom Lane
f333d35428 Doc: clarify locking requirements for ALTER TABLE ADD FOREIGN KEY.
The docs explained that a SHARE ROW EXCLUSIVE lock is needed on the
referenced table, but failed to say the same about the table being
altered.  Since the page says that ACCESS EXCLUSIVE lock is taken
unless otherwise stated, this left readers with the wrong conclusion.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/834603375.3470346.1586482852542@mail.yahoo.com
2020-04-10 13:12:58 -04:00
Tom Lane
7c91e9055d Doc: sync CREATE GROUP syntax synopsis with CREATE ROLE.
CREATE GROUP is an exact alias for CREATE ROLE, and CREATE USER is
almost an exact alias, as can easily be confirmed by checking the
code.  So the man page syntax descriptions ought to match up.  The
last few additions of role options seem to have forgotten to update
create_group.sgml, though.  Fix that, and add a naggy reminder to
create_role.sgml in hopes of not forgetting again.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/158647836143.655.9853963229391401576@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2020-04-10 10:44:09 -04:00
Michael Paquier
dd0f37ecce Fix collection of typos and grammar mistakes in the tree
This fixes some comments and documentation new as of Postgres 13.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200408165653.GF2228@telsasoft.com
2020-04-10 11:18:39 +09:00
Fujii Masao
c4f82a779d Fix typo in pg_validatebackup documentation.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/78f76a3d-1a28-a97d-0394-5c96985dd1c0@oss.nttdata.com
2020-04-09 22:38:24 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
83fd4532a7 Allow publishing partition changes via ancestors
To control whether partition changes are replicated using their own
identity and schema or an ancestor's, add a new parameter that can be
set per publication named 'publish_via_partition_root'.

This allows replicating a partitioned table into a different partition
structure on the subscriber.

Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.pghackers@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+HiwqH=Y85vRK3mOdjEkqFK+E=ST=eQiHdpj43L=_eJMOOznQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-08 11:19:23 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov
1aac32df89 Revert 0f5ca02f53
0f5ca02f53 introduces 3 new keywords.  It appears to be too much for relatively
small feature.  Given now we past feature freeze, it's already late for
discussion of the new syntax.  So, revert.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28209.1586294824%40sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-04-08 11:37:27 +03:00
Tom Lane
b63c293bcb Allow psql's \g and \gx commands to transiently change \pset options.
We invented \gx to allow the "\pset expanded" flag to be forced on
for the duration of one command output, but that turns out to not
be nearly enough to satisfy the demand for variant output formats.
Hence, make it possible to change any pset option(s) for the duration
of a single command output, by writing "option=value ..." inside
parentheses, for example
	\g (format=csv csv_fieldsep='\t') somefile

\gx can now be understood as a shorthand for including expanded=on
inside the parentheses.

Patch by me, expanding on a proposal by Pavel Stehule

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRBx9OnBPRJVtfA5ycUpySge-XootAXAsv_4rrkHxJ8eRg@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-07 17:46:29 -04:00
Alexander Korotkov
0f5ca02f53 Implement waiting for given lsn at transaction start
This commit adds following optional clause to BEGIN and START TRANSACTION
commands.

  WAIT FOR LSN lsn [ TIMEOUT timeout ]

New clause pospones transaction start till given lsn is applied on standby.
This clause allows user be sure, that changes previously made on primary would
be visible on standby.

New shared memory struct is used to track awaited lsn per backend.  Recovery
process wakes up backend once required lsn is applied.

Author: Ivan Kartyshov, Anna Akenteva
Reviewed-by: Craig Ringer, Thomas Munro, Robert Haas, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Ants Aasma, Dmitry Ivanov, Simon Riggs
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0240c26c-9f84-30ea-fca9-93ab2df5f305%40postgrespro.ru
2020-04-07 23:51:10 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera
357889eb17
Support FETCH FIRST WITH TIES
WITH TIES is an option to the FETCH FIRST N ROWS clause (the SQL
standard's spelling of LIMIT), where you additionally get rows that
compare equal to the last of those N rows by the columns in the
mandatory ORDER BY clause.

There was a proposal by Andrew Gierth to implement this functionality in
a more powerful way that would yield more features, but the other patch
had not been finished at this time, so we decided to use this one for
now in the spirit of incremental development.

Author: Surafel Temesgen <surafel3000@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q9ky7rD_A4vf=FVQvCGngm3LOes-ky0J6euMrg=_Se+ag@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87o8wvz253.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
2020-04-07 16:22:13 -04:00
Amit Kapila
33e05f89c5 Add the option to report WAL usage in EXPLAIN and auto_explain.
This commit adds a new option WAL similar to existing option BUFFERS in the
EXPLAIN command.  This option allows to include information on WAL record
generation added by commit df3b181499 in EXPLAIN output.

This also allows the WAL usage information to be displayed via
the auto_explain module.  A new parameter auto_explain.log_wal controls
whether WAL usage statistics are printed when an execution plan is logged.
This parameter has no effect unless auto_explain.log_analyze is enabled.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-06 08:02:15 +05:30
Robert Haas
0d8c9c1210 Generate backup manifests for base backups, and validate them.
A manifest is a JSON document which includes (1) the file name, size,
last modification time, and an optional checksum for each file backed
up, (2) timelines and LSNs for whatever WAL will need to be replayed
to make the backup consistent, and (3) a checksum for the manifest
itself. By default, we use CRC-32C when checksumming data files,
because we are trying to detect corruption and user error, not foil an
adversary. However, pg_basebackup and the server-side BASE_BACKUP
command now have options to select a different algorithm, so users
wanting a cryptographic hash function can select SHA-224, SHA-256,
SHA-384, or SHA-512. Users not wanting file checksums at all can
disable them, or disable generating of the backup manifest altogether.
Using a cryptographic hash function in place of CRC-32C consumes
significantly more CPU cycles, which may slow down backups in some
cases.

A new tool called pg_validatebackup can validate a backup against the
manifest. If no checksums are present, it can still check that the
right files exist and that they have the expected sizes. If checksums
are present, it can also verify that each file has the expected
checksum. Additionally, it calls pg_waldump to verify that the
expected WAL files are present and parseable. Only plain format
backups can be validated directly, but tar format backups can be
validated after extracting them.

Robert Haas, with help, ideas, review, and testing from David Steele,
Stephen Frost, Andrew Dunstan, Rushabh Lathia, Suraj Kharage, Tushar
Ahuja, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Mark Dilger, Davinder Singh, Jeevan
Chalke, Amit Kapila, Andres Freund, and Noah Misch.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZV8dw1H2bzZ9xkKwdrk8+XYa+DC9H=F7heO2zna5T6qg@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-03 15:05:59 -04:00
Michael Paquier
9d8ef98800 Add support for \aset in pgbench
This option is similar to \gset, except that it is able to store all
results from combined SQL queries into separate variables.  If a query
returns multiple rows, the last result is stored and if a query returns
no rows, nothing is stored.

While on it, add a TAP test for \gset to check for a failure when a
query returns multiple rows.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904081914200.2529@lancre
2020-04-03 11:45:15 +09:00
Robert Haas
ac44367efb pg_waldump: Add a --quiet option.
The primary motivation for this change is that it will be used by the
upcoming patch to add backup manifests, but it also seems to have some
potential more general use.

Andres Freund and Robert Haas

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20200330020814.nspra4mvby42yoa4@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-04-02 20:25:04 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
580a446c21 doc: Update for Unix-domain sockets on Windows
Update the documentation to reflect that Unix-domain sockets are now
usable on Windows.
2020-04-02 08:01:30 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov
3eabc62312 Correct CREATE INDEX documentation for opclass parameters
Old versions of opclass parameters patch supported ability to specify DEFAULT
as the opclass name in CREATE INDEX command.  This ability was removed in the
final version, but 911e702077 still mentions that in the documentation.
2020-04-01 15:01:26 +03:00
Michael Paquier
a7e8ece41c Add -c/--restore-target-wal to pg_rewind
pg_rewind needs to copy from the source cluster to the target cluster a
set of relation blocks changed from the previous checkpoint where WAL
forked up to the end of WAL on the target.  Building this list of
relation blocks requires a range of WAL segments that may not be present
anymore on the target's pg_wal, causing pg_rewind to fail.  It is
possible to work around this issue by copying manually the WAL segments
needed but this may lead to some extra and actually useless work.

This commit introduces a new option allowing pg_rewind to use a
restore_command while doing the rewind by grabbing the parameter value
of restore_command from the target cluster configuration.  This allows
the rewind operation to be more reliable, so as only the WAL segments
needed by the rewind are restored from the archives.

In order to be able to do that, a new routine is added to src/common/ to
allow frontend tools to restore files from archives using an
already-built restore command.  This version is more simple than the
backend equivalent as there is no need to handle the non-recovery case.

Author: Alexey Kondratov
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Alexander
Korotkov, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a3acff50-5a0d-9a2c-b3b2-ee36168955c1@postgrespro.ru
2020-04-01 10:57:03 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
33cd0e5ea6 doc: adjust UPDATE/DELETE's FROM/USING to match SELECT's FROM
Previously the syntax and wording were unclear.

Reported-by: Alexey Bashtanov

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/968d4724-8e58-788f-7c45-f7b1813824cc@imap.cc

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-03-31 16:31:44 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
087d3d0583 Fix assorted typos
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2020-03-31 16:00:06 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
de3bbfcc96 Fix INSERT OVERRIDING USER VALUE behavior
The original implementation disallowed using OVERRIDING USER VALUE on
identity columns defined as GENERATED ALWAYS, which is not per
standard.  So allow that now.

Expand documentation and tests around this.

Author: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAEZATCVrh2ufCwmzzM%3Dk_OfuLhTTPBJCdFkimst2kry4oHepuQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-31 08:50:39 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov
911e702077 Implement operator class parameters
PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have
much freedom in the semantics of indexing.  These index AMs are GiST, GIN,
SP-GiST and BRIN.  There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on
them and supported search strategies.  So, it's natural that opclasses may be
faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision.  This commit implements
opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to
index the particular dataset.

This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog.  Instead it uses
pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but
unused for index attributes.

In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we
implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions.  Options
are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression.  It's possible due to the
fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so
fn_expr is unused for them.

This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage.  We parametrize
signature length in GiST.  That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops,
gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and
gist_hstore_ops.  Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for
gist__int_ops.  However, the main future usage of this feature is expected
to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular
json parts.

Catversion is bumped.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me
Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 19:17:23 +03:00
David Rowley
b07642dbcd Trigger autovacuum based on number of INSERTs
Traditionally autovacuum has only ever invoked a worker based on the
estimated number of dead tuples in a table and for anti-wraparound
purposes. For the latter, with certain classes of tables such as
insert-only tables, anti-wraparound vacuums could be the first vacuum that
the table ever receives. This could often lead to autovacuum workers being
busy for extended periods of time due to having to potentially freeze
every page in the table. This could be particularly bad for very large
tables. New clusters, or recently pg_restored clusters could suffer even
more as many large tables may have the same relfrozenxid, which could
result in large numbers of tables requiring an anti-wraparound vacuum all
at once.

Here we aim to reduce the work required by anti-wraparound and aggressive
vacuums in general, by triggering autovacuum when the table has received
enough INSERTs. This is controlled by adding two new GUCs and reloptions;
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_threshold and
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_scale_factor. These work exactly the same as the
existing scale factor and threshold controls, only base themselves off the
number of inserts since the last vacuum, rather than the number of dead
tuples. New controls were added rather than reusing the existing
controls, to allow these new vacuums to be tuned independently and perhaps
even completely disabled altogether, which can be done by setting
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_threshold to -1.

We make no attempt to skip index cleanup operations on these vacuums as
they may trigger for an insert-mostly table which continually doesn't have
enough dead tuples to trigger an autovacuum for the purpose of removing
those dead tuples. If we were to skip cleaning the indexes in this case,
then it is possible for the index(es) to become bloated over time.

There are additional benefits to triggering autovacuums based on inserts,
as tables which never contain enough dead tuples to trigger an autovacuum
are now more likely to receive a vacuum, which can mark more of the table
as "allvisible" and encourage the query planner to make use of Index Only
Scans.

Currently, we still obey vacuum_freeze_min_age when triggering these new
autovacuums based on INSERTs. For large insert-only tables, it may be
beneficial to lower the table's autovacuum_freeze_min_age so that tuples
are eligible to be frozen sooner. Here we've opted not to zero that for
these types of vacuums, since the table may just be insert-mostly and we
may otherwise freeze tuples that are still destined to be updated or
removed in the near future.

There was some debate to what exactly the new scale factor and threshold
should default to. For now, these are set to 0.2 and 1000, respectively.
There may be some motivation to adjust these before the release.

Author: Laurenz Albe, Darafei Praliaskouski
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Masahiko Sawada, Chris Travers, Andres Freund, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC8Q8t%2Bj36G_bLF%3D%2B0iMo6jGNWnLnWb1tujXuJr-%2Bx8ZCCTqoQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-28 19:20:12 +13:00
Alvaro Herrera
2f9eb31320
pg_dump: Allow dumping data of specific foreign servers
The new command-line switch --include-foreign-data=PATTERN lets the user
specify foreign servers from which to dump foreign table data.  This can
be refined by further inclusion/exclusion switches, so that the user has
full control over which tables to dump.

A limitation is that this doesn't work in combination with parallel
dumps, for implementation reasons.  This might be lifted in the future,
but requires shuffling some code around.

Author: Luis Carril <luis.carril@swarm64.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Surafel Temesgen <surafel3000@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndQuadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/LEJPR01MB0185483C0079D2F651B16231E7FC0@LEJPR01MB0185.DEUPRD01.PROD.OUTLOOK.DE
2020-03-25 13:19:31 -03:00
Fujii Masao
67e0adfb3f Report NULL as total backup size if it's not estimated.
Previously 0 was reported in pg_stat_progress_basebackup.total_backup
if the total backup size was not estimated. Per discussion, our consensus
is that NULL is better choise as the value in total_backup in that case.
So this commit makes pg_stat_progress_basebackup view report NULL
in total_backup column if the estimation is disabled.

Bump catversion.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Magnus Hagander, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevExnhOD89zBDuPvfAAh243RzNpwCPEWNLtMYpKHMB8gbAQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-24 10:43:41 +09:00
Tom Lane
980a70b976 Fix our getopt_long's behavior for a command line argument of just "-".
src/port/getopt_long.c failed on such an argument, always seeing it
as an unrecognized switch.  This is unhelpful; better is to treat such
an item as a non-switch argument.  That behavior is what we find in
GNU's getopt_long(); it's what src/port/getopt.c does; and it is
required by POSIX for getopt(), which getopt_long() ought to be
generally a superset of.  Moreover, it's expected by ecpg, which
intends an argument of "-" to mean "read from stdin".  So fix it.

Also add some documentation about ecpg's behavior in this area, since
that was miserably underdocumented.  I had to reverse-engineer it
from the code.

Per bug #16304 from James Gray.  Back-patch to all supported branches,
since this has been broken forever.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16304-c662b00a1322db7f@postgresql.org
2020-03-23 11:58:00 -04:00
Michael Paquier
c81bd3b9a5 Doc: Fix type of some storage parameters in CREATE TABLE page
autovacuum_vacuum_scale_factor and autovacuum_analyze_scale_factor have
been documented as "float4", but "floating type" is used in this case
for GUCs and relation options in the documentation.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACZ0uYFf_p9BpbjLccx3CA=eM1Hk2Te=ULY4iptGLUhL-JxCPA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-03-23 13:38:03 +09:00
Fujii Masao
fab13dc50b Make pg_basebackup ask the server to estimate the total backup size, by default.
This commit changes pg_basebackup so that it specifies PROGRESS option in
BASE_BACKUP replication command whether --progress is specified or not.
This causes the server to estimate the total backup size and report it in
pg_stat_progress_basebackup.backup_total, by default. This is reasonable
default because the time required for the estimation would not be so large
in most cases.

Also this commit adds new option --no-estimate-size to pg_basebackup.
This option prevents the server from the estimation, and so is useful to
avoid such estimation time if it's too long.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander, Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEyDPPSjP7KRvfTXPdqOdY5aWNkqsB5aAXs3bco5ZwtGHg@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-19 17:09:00 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
487e9861d0
Enable BEFORE row-level triggers for partitioned tables
... with the limitation that the tuple must remain in the same
partition.

Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200227165158.GA2071@alvherre.pgsql
2020-03-18 18:58:05 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
a2b1faa0f2 Implement type regcollation
This will be helpful for a following commit and it's also just
generally useful, like the other reg* types.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro and Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm%3D0uEQCpfq_%2BLYFBdArCe4Ot98t1aR4eYiYTe%3DyavQygiQ%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-18 21:21:00 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
8408e3a557 doc: Update documentation about reg* types
Add missing index entries, add missing information on pg_upgrade man
page, order things alphabetical instead of (apparently) in the order
they were implemented, reduce repetitiveness a bit.
2020-03-18 14:54:29 +01:00
Fujii Masao
1558413432 Update the description of type of check_option reloption in docs.
Commit 773df883e8 changed the type of check_option reloption
from string to enum. But it forgot to update the description of
the type in the documentation.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACZ0uYFvHF4n6yxF390YZgr4Q0Z0c2w0ihu=DLb8ipNOnNcqzQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-18 18:28:22 +09:00
Peter Geoghegan
dbbb55385c Doc: Correct deduplicate_items varlistentry id.
Use a varlistentry id for the deduplicate_items storage parameter that
is derived from the name of the parameter itself.

This oversight happened because the storage parameter was renamed
relatively late during the development of the patch that became commit
0d861bbb.
2020-03-17 15:53:05 -07:00
Fujii Masao
28e0a103a8 Add the type information for index storage parameters to the documentation.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACZ0uYFQebs4WT5eu3dK4qm_2PurZuvB++8nDvSBG0ebRWmbdg@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-17 16:06:59 +09:00
Thomas Munro
fc34b0d9de Introduce a maintenance_io_concurrency setting.
Introduce a GUC and a tablespace option to control I/O prefetching, much
like effective_io_concurrency, but for work that is done on behalf of
many client sessions.

Use the new setting in heapam.c instead of the hard-coded formula
effective_io_concurrency + 10 introduced by commit 558a9165e0.  Go with
a default value of 10 for now, because it's a round number pretty close
to the value used for that existing case.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJUw08dPs_3EUcdO6M90GnjofPYrWp4YSLaBkgYwS-AqA%40mail.gmail.com
2020-03-16 17:14:26 +13:00
Peter Eisentraut
340de72780 doc: Remove unused title ids
FOP issues warnings about them.  These aren't even used, so just
remove them.  For the ones that are actually used, we'll come up with
a different solution.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/e29b580e-79ab-a371-5ea4-6946e4d3af0b%402ndQuadrant.com
2020-03-13 15:45:37 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
17b9e7f9fe Support adding partitioned tables to publication
When a partitioned table is added to a publication, changes of all of
its partitions (current or future) are published via that publication.

This change only affects which tables a publication considers as its
members.  The receiving side still sees the data coming from the
individual leaf partitions.  So existing restrictions that partition
hierarchies can only be replicated one-to-one are not changed by this.

Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.pghackers@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+HiwqH=Y85vRK3mOdjEkqFK+E=ST=eQiHdpj43L=_eJMOOznQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-03-10 09:09:32 +01:00
Michael Paquier
5aaa584f81 Doc: fix some description of environment variables with frontend tools
This addresses a couple of issues in the documentation:
- Description of PG_COLOR was missing for some tools (pg_archivecleanup
and pg_test_fsync), while the other descriptions had grammar mistakes.
- pgbench supports more environment variables: PGUSER, PGHOST and
PGPORT.
- vacuumlo, oid2name and pgbench support coloring (HEAD only)

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Daniel Gustafsson, Juan José Santamaría
Flecha
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200304075418.GJ2593@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 12
2020-03-09 10:53:22 +09:00
Alexander Korotkov
b0b5e20cd8 Show opclass and opfamily related information in psql
This commit provides psql commands for listing operator classes, operator
families and its contents in psql.  New commands will be useful for exploring
capabilities of both builtin opclasses/opfamilies as well as
opclasses/opfamilies defined in extensions.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1529675324.14193.5.camel%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Sergey Cherkashin, Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Alvaro Herrera, Arthur Zakirov
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Andres Freund
2020-03-08 13:33:16 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
7e39b968f1 doc: Remove unused ids
Some reference pages contained id attributes on refname elements.
These were apparently copied around from ancient times, but they don't
serve a purpose.  FOP issues minor warnings about them.  So it's
easiest to just remove them.
2020-03-07 14:04:09 +01:00
Tom Lane
fe30e7ebfa Allow ALTER TYPE to change some properties of a base type.
Specifically, this patch allows ALTER TYPE to:
* Change the default TOAST strategy for a toastable base type;
* Promote a non-toastable type to toastable;
* Add/remove binary I/O functions for a type;
* Add/remove typmod I/O functions for a type;
* Add/remove a custom ANALYZE statistics functions for a type.

The first of these can be done by the type's owner; all the others
require superuser privilege since misuse could cause problems.

The main motivation for this patch is to allow extensions to
upgrade the feature sets of their data types, so the set of
alterable properties is biased towards that use-case.  However
it's also true that changing some other properties would be
a lot harder, as they get baked into physical storage and/or
stored expressions that depend on the type.

Along the way, refactor GenerateTypeDependencies() to make it easier
to call, refactor DefineType's volatility checks so they can be shared
by AlterType, and teach typcache.c that it might have to reload data
from the type's pg_type row, a scenario it never handled before.
Also rearrange alter_type.sgml a bit for clarity (put the
composite-type operations together).

Tomas Vondra and Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200228004440.b23ein4qvmxnlpht@development
2020-03-06 12:19:29 -05:00
Tom Lane
bb03010b9f Remove the "opaque" pseudo-type and associated compatibility hacks.
A long time ago, it was necessary to declare datatype I/O functions,
triggers, and language handler support functions in a very type-unsafe
way involving a single pseudo-type "opaque".  We got rid of those
conventions in 7.3, but there was still support in various places to
automatically convert such functions to the modern declaration style,
to be able to transparently re-load dumps from pre-7.3 servers.
It seems unnecessary to continue to support that anymore, so take out
the hacks; whereupon the "opaque" pseudo-type itself is no longer
needed and can be dropped.

This is part of a group of patches removing various server-side kluges
for transparently upgrading pre-8.0 dump files.  Since we've had few
complaints about dropping pg_dump's support for dumping from pre-8.0
servers (commit 64f3524e2), it seems okay to now remove these kluges.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4110.1583255415@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-03-05 15:48:56 -05:00
Fujii Masao
e65497df8f Report progress of streaming base backup.
This commit adds pg_stat_progress_basebackup view that reports
the progress while an application like pg_basebackup is taking
a base backup. This uses the progress reporting infrastructure
added by c16dc1aca5, adding support for streaming base backup.

Bump catversion.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Amit Langote, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9ed8b801-8215-1f3d-62d7-65bff53f6e94@oss.nttdata.com
2020-03-03 12:03:43 +09:00
Peter Geoghegan
e537aed61d Doc: Fix deduplicate_items index term.
Reported-By: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18f07ae8-7d89-537c-b0a9-54100a1b46da@oss.nttdata.com
2020-02-27 09:32:34 -08:00
Peter Geoghegan
0d861bbb70 Add deduplication to nbtree.
Deduplication reduces the storage overhead of duplicates in indexes that
use the standard nbtree index access method.  The deduplication process
is applied lazily, after the point where opportunistic deletion of
LP_DEAD-marked index tuples occurs.  Deduplication is only applied at
the point where a leaf page split would otherwise be required.  New
posting list tuples are formed by merging together existing duplicate
tuples.  The physical representation of the items on an nbtree leaf page
is made more space efficient by deduplication, but the logical contents
of the page are not changed.  Even unique indexes make use of
deduplication as a way of controlling bloat from duplicates whose TIDs
point to different versions of the same logical table row.

The lazy approach taken by nbtree has significant advantages over a GIN
style eager approach.  Most individual inserts of index tuples have
exactly the same overhead as before.  The extra overhead of
deduplication is amortized across insertions, just like the overhead of
page splits.  The key space of indexes works in the same way as it has
since commit dd299df8 (the commit that made heap TID a tiebreaker
column).

Testing has shown that nbtree deduplication can generally make indexes
with about 10 or 15 tuples for each distinct key value about 2.5X - 4X
smaller, even with single column integer indexes (e.g., an index on a
referencing column that accompanies a foreign key).  The final size of
single column nbtree indexes comes close to the final size of a similar
contrib/btree_gin index, at least in cases where GIN's posting list
compression isn't very effective.  This can significantly improve
transaction throughput, and significantly reduce the cost of vacuuming
indexes.

A new index storage parameter (deduplicate_items) controls the use of
deduplication.  The default setting is 'on', so all new B-Tree indexes
automatically use deduplication where possible.  This decision will be
reviewed at the end of the Postgres 13 beta period.

There is a regression of approximately 2% of transaction throughput with
synthetic workloads that consist of append-only inserts into a table
with several non-unique indexes, where all indexes have few or no
repeated values.  The underlying issue is that cycles are wasted on
unsuccessful attempts at deduplicating items in non-unique indexes.
There doesn't seem to be a way around it short of disabling
deduplication entirely.  Note that deduplication of items in unique
indexes is fairly well targeted in general, which avoids the problem
there (we can use a special heuristic to trigger deduplication passes in
unique indexes, since we're specifically targeting "version bloat").

Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC because xl_btree_vacuum changed.

No bump in BTREE_VERSION, since the representation of posting list
tuples works in a way that's backwards compatible with version 4 indexes
(i.e. indexes built on PostgreSQL 12).  However, users must still
REINDEX a pg_upgrade'd index to use deduplication, regardless of the
Postgres version they've upgraded from.  This is the only way to set the
new nbtree metapage flag indicating that deduplication is generally
safe.

Author: Anastasia Lubennikova, Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion:
    https://postgr.es/m/55E4051B.7020209@postgrespro.ru
    https://postgr.es/m/4ab6e2db-bcee-f4cf-0916-3a06e6ccbb55@postgrespro.ru
2020-02-26 13:05:30 -08:00
Peter Geoghegan
612a1ab767 Add equalimage B-Tree support functions.
Invent the concept of a B-Tree equalimage ("equality implies image
equality") support function, registered as support function 4.  This
indicates whether it is safe (or not safe) to apply optimizations that
assume that any two datums considered equal by an operator class's order
method must be interchangeable without any loss of semantic information.
This is static information about an operator class and a collation.

Register an equalimage routine for almost all of the existing B-Tree
opclasses.  We only need two trivial routines for all of the opclasses
that are included with the core distribution.  There is one routine for
opclasses that index non-collatable types (which returns 'true'
unconditionally), plus another routine for collatable types (which
returns 'true' when the collation is a deterministic collation).

This patch is infrastructure for an upcoming patch that adds B-Tree
deduplication.

Author: Peter Geoghegan, Anastasia Lubennikova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzn3Ee49Gmxb7V1VJ3-AC8fWn-Fr8pfWQebHe8rYRxt5OQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-02-26 11:28:25 -08:00
Tom Lane
70a7732007 Remove support for upgrading extensions from "unpackaged" state.
Andres Freund pointed out that allowing non-superusers to run
"CREATE EXTENSION ... FROM unpackaged" has security risks, since
the unpackaged-to-1.0 scripts don't try to verify that the existing
objects they're modifying are what they expect.  Just attaching such
objects to an extension doesn't seem too dangerous, but some of them
do more than that.

We could have resolved this, perhaps, by still requiring superuser
privilege to use the FROM option.  However, it's fair to ask just what
we're accomplishing by continuing to lug the unpackaged-to-1.0 scripts
forward.  None of them have received any real testing since 9.1 days,
so they may not even work anymore (even assuming that one could still
load the previous "loose" object definitions into a v13 database).
And an installation that's trying to go from pre-9.1 to v13 or later
in one jump is going to have worse compatibility problems than whether
there's a trivial way to convert their contrib modules into extension
style.

Hence, let's just drop both those scripts and the core-code support
for "CREATE EXTENSION ... FROM".

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200213233015.r6rnubcvl4egdh5r@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-02-19 16:59:14 -05:00
Tom Lane
dce988145f Doc: fix old oversights in GRANT/REVOKE documentation.
The GRANTED BY clause in GRANT/REVOKE ROLE has been there since 2005
but was never documented.  I'm not sure now whether that was just an
oversight or was intentional (given the limited capability of the
option).  But seeing that pg_dumpall does emit code that uses this
option, it seems like not documenting it at all is a bad idea.

Also, when we upgraded the syntax to allow CURRENT_USER/SESSION_USER
as the privilege recipient, the role form of GRANT was incorrectly
not modified to show that, and REVOKE's docs weren't touched at all.

Although I'm not that excited about GRANTED BY, the other oversight
seems serious enough to justify a back-patch.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3070.1581526786@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-02-12 14:13:13 -05:00
Michael Paquier
dcdbb5a5db Add %x to default PROMPT1 and PROMPT2 in psql
%d can be used to track if the current connection is in a transaction
block or not, and adding it by default to the prompt has the advantage
to not need a modification of .psqlrc, something not possible depending
on the environment.

This discussion has happened across various sources, and there was a
strong consensus in favor of this change.

Author: Vik Fearing
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/09502c40-cfe1-bb29-10f9-4b3fa7b2bbb2@2ndquadrant.com
2020-02-12 13:31:14 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
e49d5ebbae Document the pg_upgrade -j/--jobs option as taking an argument 2020-02-11 23:50:04 +01:00
Amit Kapila
77a00b809a doc: Spell checking
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby
Author: Justin Pryzby
Backpatch-through: 9.6
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200206021432.GA24549@telsasoft.com
2020-02-10 08:34:43 +05:30
Alvaro Herrera
9710d3d4a8 Fix TRUNCATE .. CASCADE on partitions
When running TRUNCATE CASCADE on a child of a partitioned table
referenced by another partitioned table, the truncate was not applied to
partitions of the referencing table; this could leave rows violating the
constraint in the referencing partitioned table.  Repair by walking the
pg_constraint chain all the way up to the topmost referencing table.

Note: any partitioned tables containing FKs that reference other
partitioned tables should be checked for possible violating rows, if
TRUNCATE has occurred in partitions of the referenced table.

Reported-by: Christophe Courtois
Author: Jehan-Guillaume de Rorthais
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200204183906.115f693e@firost
2020-02-07 17:09:36 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
75cdf24ec3 ALTER SUBSCRIPTION / REFRESH docs: explain copy_data
The docs are ambiguous as to which tables would be copied over when the
copy_data parameter is true in ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... REFRESH PUBLICATION.
Make it clear that it only applies to tables which are new in the
publication.

Author: David Christensen (reword by Álvaro Herrera)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/95339420-7F09-4F8C-ACC0-8F1CFAAD9CD7@endpoint.com
2020-02-05 15:05:14 -03:00
Tom Lane
50fc694e43 Invent "trusted" extensions, and remove the pg_pltemplate catalog.
This patch creates a new extension property, "trusted".  An extension
that's marked that way in its control file can be installed by a
non-superuser who has the CREATE privilege on the current database,
even if the extension contains objects that normally would have to be
created by a superuser.  The objects within the extension will (by
default) be owned by the bootstrap superuser, but the extension itself
will be owned by the calling user.  This allows replicating the old
behavior around trusted procedural languages, without all the
special-case logic in CREATE LANGUAGE.  We have, however, chosen to
loosen the rules slightly: formerly, only a database owner could take
advantage of the special case that allowed installation of a trusted
language, but now anyone who has CREATE privilege can do so.

Having done that, we can delete the pg_pltemplate catalog, moving the
knowledge it contained into the extension script files for the various
PLs.  This ends up being no change at all for the in-core PLs, but it is
a large step forward for external PLs: they can now have the same ease
of installation as core PLs do.  The old "trusted PL" behavior was only
available to PLs that had entries in pg_pltemplate, but now any
extension can be marked trusted if appropriate.

This also removes one of the stumbling blocks for our Python 2 -> 3
migration, since the association of "plpythonu" with Python 2 is no
longer hard-wired into pg_pltemplate's initial contents.  Exactly where
we go from here on that front remains to be settled, but one problem
is fixed.

Patch by me, reviewed by Peter Eisentraut, Stephen Frost, and others.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5889.1566415762@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-01-29 18:42:43 -05:00
Amit Kapila
47bc9ced0d Add --parallel option to vacuumdb command.
Commit 40d964ec99 allowed vacuum command to leverage multiple CPUs by
invoking parallel workers to process indexes.  This commit provides a
'--parallel' option to specify the parallel degree used by vacuum command.

Author: Masahiko Sawada, with few modifications by me
Reviewed-by: Mahendra Singh and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDTPMgzSkV4E3SFo1CH_x50bf5PqZFQf4jmqjk-C03BWg@mail.gmail.com
2020-01-29 11:08:50 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
a7a848844d Fix typo 2020-01-24 12:18:07 +01:00
Michael Paquier
6de7bcb76f Doc: Fix list of storage parameters available for ALTER TABLE
Only the parameter parallel_workers can be used directly with ALTER
TABLE.

Issue introduced in 6f3a13f, so backpatch down to 10.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200106025623.GA12066@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 10
2020-01-24 09:55:21 +09:00
Michael Paquier
a904abe2e2 Fix concurrent indexing operations with temporary tables
Attempting to use CREATE INDEX, DROP INDEX or REINDEX with CONCURRENTLY
on a temporary relation with ON COMMIT actions triggered unexpected
errors because those operations use multiple transactions internally to
complete their work.  Here is for example one confusing error when using
ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS:
ERROR:  index "foo" already contains data

Issues related to temporary relations and concurrent indexing are fixed
in this commit by enforcing the non-concurrent path to be taken for
temporary relations even if using CONCURRENTLY, transparently to the
user.  Using a non-concurrent path does not matter in practice as locks
cannot be taken on a temporary relation by a session different than the
one owning the relation, and the non-concurrent operation is more
effective.

The problem exists with REINDEX since v12 with the introduction of
CONCURRENTLY, and with CREATE/DROP INDEX since CONCURRENTLY exists for
those commands.  In all supported versions, this caused only confusing
error messages to be generated.  Note that with REINDEX, it was also
possible to issue a REINDEX CONCURRENTLY for a temporary relation owned
by a different session, leading to a server crash.

The idea to enforce transparently the non-concurrent code path for
temporary relations comes originally from Andres Freund.

Reported-by: Manuel Rigger
Author: Michael Paquier, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+u7OA6gP7YAeCguyseusYcc=uR8+ypjCcgDDCTzjQ+k6S9ksQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2020-01-22 09:49:18 +09:00
Tom Lane
9b9c5f279e Clarify behavior of adding and altering a column in same ALTER command.
The behavior of something like

ALTER TABLE transactions
  ADD COLUMN status varchar(30) DEFAULT 'old',
  ALTER COLUMN status SET default 'current';

is to fill existing table rows with 'old', not 'current'.  That's
intentional and desirable for a couple of reasons:

* It makes the behavior the same whether you merge the sub-commands
into one ALTER command or give them separately;

* If we applied the new default while filling the table, there would
be no way to get the existing behavior in one SQL command.

The same reasoning applies in cases that add a column and then
manipulate its GENERATED/IDENTITY status in a second sub-command,
since the generation expression is really just a kind of default.
However, that wasn't very obvious (at least not to me; earlier in
the referenced discussion thread I'd thought it was a bug to be
fixed).  And it certainly wasn't documented.

Hence, add documentation, code comments, and a test case to clarify
that this behavior is all intentional.

In passing, adjust ATExecAddColumn's defaults-related relkind check
so that it matches up exactly with ATRewriteTables, instead of being
effectively (though not literally) the negated inverse condition.
The reasoning can be explained a lot more concisely that way, too
(not to mention that the comment now matches the code, which it
did not before).

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/10365.1558909428@sss.pgh.pa.us
2020-01-21 16:17:21 -05:00
Amit Kapila
40d964ec99 Allow vacuum command to process indexes in parallel.
This feature allows the vacuum to leverage multiple CPUs in order to
process indexes.  This enables us to perform index vacuuming and index
cleanup with background workers.  This adds a PARALLEL option to VACUUM
command where the user can specify the number of workers that can be used
to perform the command which is limited by the number of indexes on a
table.  Specifying zero as a number of workers will disable parallelism.
This option can't be used with the FULL option.

Each index is processed by at most one vacuum process.  Therefore parallel
vacuum can be used when the table has at least two indexes.

The parallel degree is either specified by the user or determined based on
the number of indexes that the table has, and further limited by
max_parallel_maintenance_workers.  The index can participate in parallel
vacuum iff it's size is greater than min_parallel_index_scan_size.

Author: Masahiko Sawada and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Amit Kapila, Robert Haas, Tomas Vondra,
Mahendra Singh and Sergei Kornilov
Tested-by: Mahendra Singh and Prabhat Sahu
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDTPMgzSkV4E3SFo1CH_x50bf5PqZFQf4jmqjk-C03BWg@mail.gmail.com
https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1J-VoR9gzS5E75pcD-OH0mEyCdp8RihcwKrcuw7J-Q0+w@mail.gmail.com
2020-01-20 07:57:49 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
f595117e24 ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... DROP EXPRESSION
Add an ALTER TABLE subcommand for dropping the generated property from
a column, per SQL standard.

Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/2f7f1d9c-946e-0453-d841-4f38eb9d69b6%402ndquadrant.com
2020-01-14 13:36:03 +01:00
Michael Paquier
00b047fa67 doc: Fix naming of SELinux
Reported-by: Tham Nguyen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157851402876.29175.12977878383183540468@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2020-01-10 09:36:55 +09:00
Fujii Masao
1ab029d528 Add note about how each partition's default value is treated, into the doc.
Column defaults may be specified separately for each partition.
But INSERT via a partitioned table ignores those partition's default values.
The former is documented, but the latter restriction not.
This commit adds the note about that restriction into the document.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwEs-59omrfGF7hOHz9iMME3RbKy5ny+iftDx3LHTEn9sA@mail.gmail.com
2019-12-26 15:07:43 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
4cab43ec80 docs: clarify handling of column lists in COPY TO/FROM
Previously it was unclear how COPY FROM handled cases where not all
columns were specified, or if the order didn't match.

Reported-by: pavlo.golub@gmail.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157487729344.7213.14245726713444755296@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-12-21 12:44:38 -05:00
Michael Paquier
52dcfda487 Doc: Improve readability of options for REINDEX
That's more consistent with the style we have been using with for
example EXPLAIN, VACUUM or ANALYZE (this one had only one option in
v11).  Based on a suggestion from Pavel Stehule.

Author: Josef Šimánek
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRCrUS+eMFvssVPGZN-VDEMP3XN+1Dop0=CmeBq2D+dqOg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFp7QwpeMPEtAR5AYpsG623ooMWX03wMjq5cpZn=X+6OCkfwJw@mail.gmail.com
2019-12-18 11:07:36 +09:00
Tom Lane
d3aa114ac4 Doc: improve discussion of race conditions involved in LISTEN.
The user docs didn't really explain how to use LISTEN safely,
so clarify that.  Also clean up some fuzzy-headed explanations
in comments.  No code changes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3ac7f397-4d5f-be8e-f354-440020675694@gmail.com
2019-11-24 18:03:39 -05:00
Thomas Munro
1974853d89 doc: Fix whitespace in syntax.
Back-patch to 10.

Author: Andreas Karlsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/043acae2-a369-b7fa-be48-1933aa2e82d1%40proxel.se
2019-11-25 09:23:10 +13:00
Tom Lane
d1c866e57f Make psql redisplay the query buffer after \e.
Up to now, whatever you'd edited was put back into the query buffer
but not redisplayed, which is less than user-friendly.  But we can
improve that just by printing the text along with a prompt, if we
enforce that the editing result ends with a newline (which it
typically would anyway).  You then continue typing more lines if
you want, or you can type ";" or do \g or \r or another \e.

This is intentionally divorced from readline's processing,
for simplicity and so that it works the same with or without
readline enabled.  We discussed possibly integrating things
more closely with readline; but that seems difficult, uncertainly
portable across different readline and libedit versions, and
of limited real benefit anyway.  Let's try the simple way and
see if it's good enough.

Patch by me, thanks to Fabien Coelho and Laurenz Albe for review

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/13192.1572318028@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-11-22 17:07:54 -05:00
Fujii Masao
30840c92ac Allow ALTER VIEW command to rename the column in the view.
ALTER TABLE RENAME COLUMN command always can be used to rename the column
in the view, but it's reasonable to add that syntax to ALTER VIEW too.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed, Yu Kimura
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHoQMD3b-MqTLcp1MgdhCpOKU7QNRwjFooT4_d+ti5v6g@mail.gmail.com
2019-11-21 19:55:13 +09:00
Amit Kapila
80e05a088e Add the support for '-f' option in dropdb utility.
Specifying '-f' will add the 'force' option to the DROP DATABASE command
sent to the server.  This will try to terminate all existing connections
to the target database before dropping it.

Author: Pavel Stehule
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmLJJbn70vLOZFpxGw3XD7nLB_7+NKz46H5EOO2k5H7OQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-11-20 08:25:07 +05:30
Tom Lane
5b805886ca Doc: clarify use of RECURSIVE in WITH.
Apparently some people misinterpreted the syntax as being that
RECURSIVE is a prefix of individual WITH queries.  It's a modifier
for the WITH clause as a whole, so state that more clearly.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ca53c6ce-a0c6-b14a-a8e3-162f0b2cc119@a-kretschmer.de
2019-11-19 14:43:37 -05:00
Tom Lane
787b3fd33f Doc: clarify behavior of ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES ... IN SCHEMA.
The existing text stated that "Default privileges that are specified
per-schema are added to whatever the global default privileges are for
the particular object type".  However, that bare-bones observation is
not quite clear enough, as demonstrated by the complaint in bug #16124.
Flesh it out by stating explicitly that you can't revoke built-in
default privileges this way, and by providing an example to drive
the point home.

Back-patch to all supported branches, since it's been like this
from the beginning.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16124-423d8ee4358421bc@postgresql.org
2019-11-19 14:21:41 -05:00
Thomas Munro
7f338369ca Allow invisible PROMPT2 in psql.
Keep track of the visible width of PROMPT1, and provide %w as a way
for PROMPT2 to generate the same number of spaces.

Author: Thomas Munro, with ideas from others
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BzGd7RigjWbxwhzGW59gUpf76ydQECeGdEdodH6nd__A%40mail.gmail.com
2019-11-19 15:56:21 +13:00
Alvaro Herrera
6ae4d27187 Remove the word "virgins" for documentation
Apparently, it's no longer welcome.  Therefore replace it with "pristine",
and add some explanatory text while at it.

Reported by Brian Williams
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157313712259.14261.16141263269989647311@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2019-11-14 17:33:26 -03:00
Amit Kapila
1379fd537f Introduce the 'force' option for the Drop Database command.
This new option terminates the other sessions connected to the target
database and then drop it.  To terminate other sessions, the current user
must have desired permissions (same as pg_terminate_backend()).  We don't
allow to terminate the sessions if prepared transactions, active logical
replication slots or subscriptions are present in the target database.

Author: Pavel Stehule with changes by me
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Ibrar Ahmed, Anthony Nowocien,
Ryan Lambert and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmLJJbn70vLOZFpxGw3XD7nLB_7+NKz46H5EOO2k5H7OQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-11-13 08:25:33 +05:30
Fujii Masao
a386942bd2 Add "G" (server-side data generation) as an initialization step in pgbench.
This commit allows --init-steps option in pgbench to accept "G" character
meaning server-side data generation as an initialization step.
With "G", only limited queries are sent from pgbench client and
then data is actually generated in the server. This might make
the initialization phase faster if the bandwidth between pgbench client
and the server is low.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Anna Endo, Ibrar Ahmed, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904061826420.3678@lancre
2019-11-06 11:02:30 +09:00
Michael Paquier
2a4d96ebbd Doc: Clarify locks taken when using ALTER TABLE ATTACH PARTITION
Since 898e5e32, this command uses partially ShareUpdateExclusiveLock,
but the docs did not get the call.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191028001207.GB23808@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-11-05 10:32:38 +09:00
Michael Paquier
ea88133801 Doc: Improve description around ALTER TABLE ATTACH PARTITION
This clarifies more how to use and how to take advantage of constraints
when attaching a new partition.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191028001207.GB23808@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 10
2019-11-05 10:17:33 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
cbe63d02d0 doc: Use proper em and en dashes 2019-10-25 20:39:41 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
59c2617af3 docs: fix wording of REFRESH CONCURRENTLY manual page
Reported-by: Asim / apraveen@pivotal.io

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/157076828181.26165.15231292023740913543@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-10-23 20:29:02 -04:00
Thomas Munro
d5ac14f9cc Use libc version as a collation version on glibc systems.
Using glibc's version string to detect potential collation definition
changes is not 100% reliable, but it's better than nothing.  Currently
this affects only collations explicitly provided by "libc".  More work
will be needed to handle the default collation.

Author: Thomas Munro, based on a suggestion from Christoph Berg
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4b76c6d4-ae5e-0dc6-7d0d-b5c796a07e34%402ndquadrant.com
2019-10-16 17:28:24 +13:00
Michael Paquier
4351142e58 Doc: Fix various inconsistencies
This fixes multiple areas of the documentation:
- COPY for its past compatibility section.
- SET ROLE mentioning INHERITS instead of INHERIT
- PREPARE referring to stmt_name, that is not present.
- Extension documentation about format name with upgrade scripts.

Backpatch down to 9.4 for the relevant parts.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bf95233a-9943-b341-e2ff-a860c28af481@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-10-16 13:09:52 +09:00
Michael Paquier
caa078353e Improve handling and coverage of --no-ensure-shutdown in pg_rewind
This includes a couple of changes around the new behavior of pg_rewind
which enforces recovery to happen once on a cluster not shut down
cleanly:
- Some comments and documentation improvements.
- Shutdown the cluster to rewind with immediate mode in all the tests,
this allows to check after the forced recovery behavior which is wanted
as new default.
- Use -F for the forced recovery step, so as postgres does not use
fsync.  This was useless as a final sync is done once the tool is done.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Alexey Kondratov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191004083721.GA1829@paquier.xyz
2019-10-07 09:07:22 +09:00
Amit Kapila
b1c1aa5318 pgbench: add --partitions and --partition-method options.
These new options allow users to partition the pgbench_accounts table by
specifying the number of partitions and partitioning method.  The values
allowed for partitioning method are range and hash.

This feature allows users to measure the overhead of partitioning if any.

Author: Fabien COELHO
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Amit Langote, Dilip Kumar, Asif Rehman, and
Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1907230826190.7008@lancre
2019-10-03 08:27:07 +05:30
Tom Lane
ce734aaec1 Doc: improve PREPARE documentation, cross-referencing to plan_cache_mode.
The behavior described in the PREPARE man page applies only for the
default plan_cache_mode setting, so explain that properly.  Rewrite
some of the text while I'm here.  Per suggestion from Bruce.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190930155505.GA21095@momjian.us
2019-09-30 14:31:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7e0fb165dd docs: adjust multi-column most-common-value statistics
This commit adds a mention that the order of columns specified during
multi-column most-common-value statistics is insignificant, and tries to
simplify examples.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190828162238.GA8360@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 12
2019-09-30 13:44:22 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
927474ce1a pg_rewind: Allow writing recovery configuration
This is provided with a new switch --write-recovery-conf and reuses the
pg_basebackup code.

Author: Paul Guo, Jimmy Yih, Ashwin Agrawal
Reviewed-by: Alexey Kondratov, Michaël Paquier, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEET0ZEffUkXc48pg2iqARQgGRYDiiVxDu+yYek_bTwJF+q=Uw@mail.gmail.com
2019-09-30 12:57:35 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
92f1545d6e doc: Add a link target
Forward-patched from PostgreSQL 12 release notes patch, for
consistency.
2019-09-29 09:51:43 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera
5adafaf176 Have pg_rewind run crash recovery before rewinding
If we don't do this, the rewind fails if the server wasn't cleanly shut
down, which seems unhelpful serving no purpose.

Also provide a new option --no-ensure-shutdown to suppress this
behavior, for alleged advanced usage that prefers to avoid the crash
recovery.

Authors: Paul Guo, Jimmy Yih, Ashwin Agrawal
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEET0ZEffUkXc48pg2iqARQgGRYDiiVxDu+yYek_bTwJF+q=Uw@mail.gmail.com
2019-09-27 16:40:01 -03:00
Amit Kapila
70377cf4c6 Fix typo in commit 578b229718.
Reported-by: Filip Rembiałkowski
Author: Filip Rembiałkowski
Backpatch-through: 12, where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmSNy1=_82rwGe3-X4PjWqPSFXtzNf43DCtGzD7SazdXA@mail.gmail.com
2019-09-19 14:40:09 +05:30
Tomas Vondra
d06215d03b Allow setting statistics target for extended statistics
When building statistics, we need to decide how many rows to sample and
how accurate the resulting statistics should be. Until now, it was not
possible to explicitly define statistics target for extended statistics
objects, the value was always computed from the per-attribute targets
with a fallback to the system-wide default statistics target.

That's a bit inconvenient, as it ties together the statistics target set
for per-column and extended statistics. In some cases it may be useful
to require larger sample / higher accuracy for extended statics (or the
other way around), but with this approach that's not possible.

So this commit introduces a new command, allowing to specify statistics
target for individual extended statistics objects, overriding the value
derived from per-attribute targets (and the system default).

  ALTER STATISTICS stat_name SET STATISTICS target_value;

When determining statistics target for an extended statistics object we
first look at this explicitly set value. When this value is -1, we fall
back to the old formula, looking at the per-attribute targets first and
then the system default. This means the behavior is backwards compatible
with older PostgreSQL releases.

Author: Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190618213357.vli3i23vpkset2xd@development
Reviewed-by: Kirk Jamison, Dean Rasheed
2019-09-11 00:25:51 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
862ef372d6 Fix behavior of AND CHAIN outside of explicit transaction blocks
When using COMMIT AND CHAIN or ROLLBACK AND CHAIN not in an explicit
transaction block, the previous implementation would leave a
transaction block active in the ROLLBACK case but not the COMMIT case.
To fix for now, error out when using these commands not in an explicit
transaction block.  This restriction could be lifted if a sensible
definition and implementation is found.

Bug: #15977
Author: fn ln <emuser20140816@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2019-09-08 16:23:03 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
8e929a4667 doc: Clean up title case use
Note: Following existing practice, titles of formalpara and step are
not titlecased.
2019-09-08 10:27:29 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
021da890bc doc: Fix awkward markup 2019-09-06 22:19:53 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
10f5544896 Clarify pg_dump documentation
Clarify in the help output and documentation that -n, -t etc. take a
"pattern" rather than a "schema" or "table" etc.  This was especially
confusing now that the new pg_dumpall --exclude-database option was
documented with "pattern" and the others not, even though they all
behave the same.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b85f3fa1-b350-38d1-1893-4f7911bd7310%402ndquadrant.com
2019-09-03 14:25:26 +02:00
Michael Paquier
0431a78746 Doc: Improve wording of multiple places in documentation
This has been found during its translation.

Author: Liudmila Mantrova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEkD-mDJHV3bhgezu3MUafJLoAKsOOT86+wHukKU8_NeiJYhLQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-08-20 12:36:31 +09:00
Tom Lane
bb5ae8f6c4 Use a hash table to de-duplicate NOTIFY events faster.
Previously, async.c got rid of duplicate notifications by scanning
the list of pending events to compare each one to the proposed new
event.  This works okay for very small numbers of distinct events,
but degrades as O(N^2) for many events.  We can improve matters by
using a hash table to probe for duplicates.  So as not to add a
lot of overhead for the simple cases that the code did handle well
before, create the hash table only once a (sub)transaction has
queued more than 16 distinct notify events.

A downside is that we now have to do per-event work to propagate
a successful subtransaction's notify events up to its parent.
(But this isn't significant unless the subtransaction had many
events, in which case the O(N^2) behavior would have been in
play already, so we still come out ahead.)

We can make some lemonade out of this lemon, though: since we must
examine each event anyway, it's now possible to de-duplicate events
fully, rather than skipping that for events merged up from
subtransactions.  Hence, remove the old weasel wording in notify.sgml
about whether de-duplication happens or not, and adjust the test
case in async-notify.spec that exhibited the old behavior.

While at it, rearrange the definition of struct Notification to make
it more compact and require just one palloc per event, rather than
two or three.  This saves space when there are a lot of events,
in fact more than enough to buy back the space needed for the hash
table.

Patch by me, based on discussions around a different patch
submitted by Filip Rembiałkowski.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17822.1564186806@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-08-15 12:22:12 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
956451e8bc Clarify the default partition's role
Reviewed by Tom Lane and Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190806222735.GA9535@alvherre.pgsql
2019-08-08 16:05:59 -04:00
Tom Lane
e94cd0a8eb Doc: document permissions required for ANALYZE.
VACUUM's reference page had this text, but ANALYZE's didn't.  That's
a clear oversight given that section 5.7 explicitly delegates the
responsibility to define permissions requirements to the individual
commands' man pages.

Per gripe from Isaac Morland.  Back-patch to all supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsGm5fp3oBUs-2iRfii0iEO=fZuJALVyM2zJLhNTjG34gpAVQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-08-07 18:09:28 -04:00
Michael Paquier
8548ddc61b Fix inconsistencies and typos in the tree, take 9
This addresses more issues with code comments, variable names and
unreferenced variables.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7ab243e0-116d-3e44-d120-76b3df7abefd@gmail.com
2019-08-05 12:14:58 +09:00
Michael Paquier
eb43f3d193 Fix inconsistencies and typos in the tree
This is numbered take 8, and addresses again a set of issues with code
comments, variable names and unreferenced variables.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b137b5eb-9c95-9c2f-586e-38aba7d59788@gmail.com
2019-07-29 12:28:30 +09:00
Michael Paquier
5ab892c391 Add support for --jobs in reindexdb
When doing a schema-level or a database-level operation, a list of
relations to build is created which gets processed in parallel using
multiple connections, based on the recent refactoring for parallel slots
in src/bin/scripts/.  System catalogs are processed first in a
serialized fashion to prevent deadlocks, followed by the rest done in
parallel.

This new option is not compatible with --system as reindexing system
catalogs in parallel can lead to deadlocks, and with --index as there is
no conflict handling for indexes rebuilt in parallel depending in the
same relation.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOBaU_YrnH_Jqo46NhaJ7uRBiWWEcS40VNRQxgFbqYo9kApUsg@mail.gmail.com
2019-07-27 22:21:18 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
4552c0f566 pg_upgrade: Update obsolescent documentation note
Recently released xfsprogs 5.1.0 has reflink support enabled by
default, so the note that it's not enabled by default can be removed.
2019-07-27 08:26:33 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
959f6d6a18 pg_upgrade: Default new bindir to pg_upgrade location
Make the directory where the pg_upgrade binary resides the default for
new bindir, as running the pg_upgrade binary from where the new
cluster is installed is a very common scenario.  Setting this as the
defauly bindir for the new cluster will remove the need to provide it
explicitly via -B in many cases.

To support directories being missing from option parsing, extend the
directory check with a missingOk mode where the path must be filled at
a later point before being used.  Also move the exec_path check to
earlier in setup to make sure we know the new cluster bindir when we
scan for required executables.

This removes the exec_path from the OSInfo struct as it is not used
anywhere.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9328.1552952117@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-07-27 08:19:04 +02:00
Michael Paquier
fd7d387e05 Doc: Clarify interactions of pg_receivewal with remote_apply
Using pg_receivewal with synchronous_commit = remote_apply set in the
backend is incompatible if pg_receivewal is a synchronous standby as it
never applies WAL, so document this problem and solutions to it.

Backpatch to 9.6, where remote_apply has been added.

Author: Robert Haas, Jesper Pedersen
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1427a2d3-1e51-9335-1931-4f8853d90d5e@redhat.com
Backpatch-through: 9.6
2019-07-24 11:25:43 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
06140c201b Add CREATE DATABASE LOCALE option
This sets both LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE with one option.  Similar
behavior is already supported in initdb, CREATE COLLATION, and
createdb.

Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d9d5043a-dc70-da8a-0166-1e218e6e34d4%402ndquadrant.com
2019-07-23 14:47:24 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
7961886580 Revert "initdb: Change authentication defaults"
This reverts commit 09f08930f0.

The buildfarm client needs some adjustments first.
2019-07-22 19:28:25 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
09f08930f0 initdb: Change authentication defaults
Change the defaults for the pg_hba.conf generated by initdb to "peer"
for local (if supported, else "md5") and "md5" for host.

(Changing from "md5" to SCRAM is left as a separate exercise.)

"peer" is currently not supported on AIX, HP-UX, and Windows.  Users
on those operating systems will now either have to provide a password
to initdb or choose a different authentication method when running
initdb.

Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/bec17f0a-ddb1-8b95-5e69-368d9d0a3390%40postgresql.org
2019-07-22 15:14:27 +02:00
Michael Paquier
1c1602b8b6 Simplify description of --data-checksums in documentation of initdb
The documentation mentioned that data checksums cannot be changed after
initialization, which is not true as pg_checksums can do that with its
--enable option introduced in v12.  This simply removes the sentence
telling so.

Reported-by: Basil Bourque
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15909-e9d74271f1647472@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-07-18 10:05:59 +09:00
Thomas Munro
5823677acc Provide pgbench --show-script to dump built-in scripts.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904081737390.5867%40lancre
2019-07-16 11:57:49 +12:00
Thomas Munro
0369f47366 Fix documentation for pgbench tpcb-like.
We choose a random value for delta, not balance.  Back-patch to 9.6 where
the mistake arrived.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904081752210.5867@lancre
2019-07-14 14:22:57 +12:00
Michael Paquier
170d11b8e7 Fix and improve several places in the docs
This adds some missing markups, fixes a couple of incorrect ones and
clarifies some documentation in various places.

Author: Liudmila Mantrova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a068f947-7a51-5df1-b3fd-1a131ae5c044@postgrespro.ru
Backpatch-through: 12
2019-07-13 14:43:29 +09:00
Tom Lane
0ab1a2e39b Remove dead encoding-conversion functions.
The code for conversions SQL_ASCII <-> MULE_INTERNAL and
SQL_ASCII <-> UTF8 was unreachable, because we long ago changed
the wrapper functions pg_do_encoding_conversion() et al so that
they have hard-wired behaviors for conversions involving SQL_ASCII.
(At least some of those fast paths date back to 2002, though it
looks like we may not have been totally consistent about this until
later.)  Given the lack of complaints, nobody is dissatisfied with
this state of affairs.  Hence, let's just remove the unreachable code.

Also, change CREATE CONVERSION so that it rejects attempts to
define such conversions.  Since we consider that SQL_ASCII represents
lack of knowledge about the encoding in use, such a conversion would
be semantically dubious even if it were reachable.

Adjust a couple of regression test cases that had randomly decided
to rely on these conversion functions rather than any other ones.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/41163.1559156593@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-07-05 14:17:27 -04:00
Tom Lane
02e95a5049 Add \warn command to psql.
This is like \echo except that the text is sent to stderr not stdout.

In passing, fix a pre-existing bug in \echo and \qecho: per documentation
the -n switch should only be recognized when it is the first argument,
but actually any argument matching "-n" was treated as a switch.
(Should we back-patch that?)

David Fetter (bug fix by me), reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190421183115.GA4311@fetter.org
2019-07-05 12:32:36 -04:00
Tom Lane
03e7b302b1 Doc: document table persistence display in \dt+.
Forgotten in commit 9a2ea6183.
2019-07-03 12:18:10 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
55ed3defc9 Fix partitioned index creation with foreign partitions
When a partitioned tables contains foreign tables as partitions, it is
not possible to implement unique or primary key indexes -- but when
regular indexes are created, there is no reason to do anything other
than ignoring such partitions.  We were raising errors upon encountering
the foreign partitions, which is unfriendly and doesn't protect against
any actual problems.

Relax this restriction so that index creation is allowed on partitioned
tables containing foreign partitions, becoming a no-op on them.  (We may
later want to redefine this so that the FDW is told to create the
indexes on the foreign side.)  This applies to CREATE INDEX, as well as
ALTER TABLE / ATTACH PARTITION and CREATE TABLE / PARTITION OF.

Backpatch to 11, where indexes on partitioned tables were introduced.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15724-d5a58fa9472eef4f@postgresql.org
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote
2019-06-26 18:38:51 -04:00
Michael Paquier
ce59b75d44 Add toast-level reloption for vacuum_index_cleanup
a96c41f has introduced the option for heap, but it still lacked the
variant to control the behavior for toast relations.

While on it, refactor the tests so as they stress more scenarios with
the various values that vacuum_index_cleanup can use.  It would be
useful to couple those tests with pageinspect to check that pages are
actually cleaned up, but this is left for later.

Author: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoCqs8iN04RX=i1KtLSaX5RrTEM04b7NHYps4+rqtpWNEg@mail.gmail.com
2019-06-25 09:09:27 +09:00
Tomas Vondra
7f44efa10b Fix incorrect CREATE STATISTICS example in docs
The example was incorrectly using parantheses around the list of columns, so
just drop them.

Reported-By: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BTgmoZZEMAqWMAfvLHZnK57SoxOutgvE-ALO94WsRA7zZ7wyQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-06-16 01:20:42 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera
a193cbec11 Add pg_dumpall --rows-per-insert
Commit 7e413a0f82 added that option to pg_dump, but neglected to teach
pg_dumpall how to pass it along.  Repair.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/45f50c59-ddbb-8cf2-eedb-81003f603528@2ndquadrant.com
2019-06-14 18:21:52 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
313f56ce2d Tweak libpq's PQhost, PQhostaddr, and psql's \connect
Fixes some problems introduced by 6e5f8d489a:

* When reusing conninfo data from the previous connection in \connect,
  the host address should only be reused if it was specified as
  hostaddr; if it wasn't, then 'host' is resolved afresh.  We were
  reusing the same IP address, which ignores a possible DNS change
  as well as any other addresses that the name resolves to than the
  one that was used in the original connection.

* PQhost, PQhostaddr: Don't present user-specified hostaddr when we have
  an inet_net_ntop-produced equivalent address.  The latter has been
  put in canonical format, which is cleaner (so it produces "127.0.0.1"
  when given "host=2130706433", for example).

* Document the hostaddr-reusing aspect of \connect.

* Fix some code comments

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reported-by: Noah Misch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190527203713.GA58392@gust.leadboat.com
2019-06-14 18:02:26 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
9f05c44ba4 Fix order of steps in DISCARD ALL documentation
The docs have always been slightly inaccurate, but got particularly so
in a874fe7b4c, which made DISCARD ALL occur before everything else;
reorder.

Author: Jan Chochol
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEASf_3TzBbnXm64HpnD5zCZEh8An9jN8ubMR=De-vOXHMHGeA@mail.gmail.com
2019-06-11 12:22:11 -04:00
Michael Paquier
727e45c8a4 Fix documentation of ALTER TABLE for stored values
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAA_gvZ002U6kovOHu0FsM7ieoCzdSqWBd7_KaQL0UMKg@mail.gmail.com
2019-06-11 12:58:51 +09:00
David Rowley
6c0c283837 Docs: concurrent builds of partitioned indexes are not supported
Document that CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY is not currently supported for
indexes on partitioned tables.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f_CErd2z9L21Q8OGLD4TgH7yw1z9MAtHTSO13sXVG-yow@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 11
2019-06-06 12:36:37 +12:00
Michael Paquier
fc115d0f9f Rework options of pg_checksums options for filenode handling
This makes the tool consistent with the option set of oid2name, which
has been historically using -f for filenodes, and has more recently
gained long options and --filenode via 1aaf532.

Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut
Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/97045260-fb9e-e145-a950-cf7d28c4eaea@2ndquadrant.com
2019-05-30 16:58:17 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
00ef6e3b28 doc: Fix generated column documentation
The old text still had an implicit reference to the virtual behavior,
which was not in the final patch.

Author: Tobias Bussmann <t.bussmann@gmx.net>
2019-05-27 12:26:16 -04:00
Tom Lane
591fb289c3 Doc: fix typo in pgbench random_zipfian() documentation.
Per bug #15819 from Koizumi Satoru.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15819-e6191bef1f7334c0@postgresql.org
2019-05-24 11:16:06 -04:00
Michael Paquier
657c2384c6 Remove -o/--oids from pg_dumpall
This has been forgotten in 578b229, which has removed support for WITH
OIDS.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q99FcFCoG6ddke0V-AksGe82L_+bhDWgEfgZBakB840zA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Surafel Temesgen
2019-05-23 09:36:28 +09:00
Fujii Masao
03de5187d5 Mention ANALYZE boolean options in documentation.
Commit 41b54ba78e allowed not only VACUUM but also ANALYZE options
to take a boolean argument. But it forgot to update the documentation
for ANALYZE. This commit adds the descriptions about those ANALYZE
boolean options into the documentation.

This patch also updates tab-completion for ANALYZE boolean options.

Reported-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHTUt-kuwgiwe8f0AvTnB+ySqJWh95jvmh-qcoKW9YA9g@mail.gmail.com
2019-05-23 01:18:16 +09:00
Michael Paquier
03310dbea9 Fix some grammar in documentation of spgist and pgbench
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/92961161-9b49-e42f-0a72-d5d47e0ed4de@postgrespro.ru
Author: Liudmila Mantrova
Reviewed-by: Jonathan Katz, Tom Lane, Michael Paquier
Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-05-20 09:47:19 +09:00
Thomas Munro
098344be66 Fix copy-and-paste mistakes in documentation.
Reported-by: Vik Fearing
2019-05-08 21:16:36 +12:00
Fujii Masao
b84dbc8eb8 Add TRUNCATE parameter to VACUUM.
This commit adds new parameter to VACUUM command, TRUNCATE,
which specifies that VACUUM should attempt to truncate off
any empty pages at the end of the table and allow the disk space
for the truncated pages to be returned to the operating system.

This parameter, if specified, overrides the vacuum_truncate
reloption. If neither the reloption nor the VACUUM option is
used, the default is true, as before.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoD+qtrSDL=GSma4Wd3kLYLeRC0hPna-YAdkDeV4z156vg@mail.gmail.com
2019-05-08 02:10:33 +09:00
Amit Kapila
7db0cde6b5 Revert "Avoid the creation of the free space map for small heap relations".
This feature was using a process local map to track the first few blocks
in the relation.  The map was reset each time we get the block with enough
freespace.  It was discussed that it would be better to track this map on
a per-relation basis in relcache and then invalidate the same whenever
vacuum frees up some space in the page or when FSM is created.  The new
design would be better both in terms of API design and performance.

List of commits reverted, in reverse chronological order:

06c8a5090e  Improve code comments in b0eaa4c51b.
13e8643bfc  During pg_upgrade, conditionally skip transfer of FSMs.
6f918159a9  Add more tests for FSM.
9c32e4c350  Clear the local map when not used.
29d108cdec  Update the documentation for FSM behavior..
08ecdfe7e5  Make FSM test portable.
b0eaa4c51b  Avoid creation of the free space map for small heap relations.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190416180452.3pm6uegx54iitbt5@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-05-07 09:30:24 +05:30
Bruce Momjian
26950273dc doc: clarify behavior of pg_upgrade's clone mode
Be more precise about the benefits of using clone mode.
2019-05-01 09:09:28 -04:00
Andres Freund
b06a354e38 docs: Fix small copy & paste mistake.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190418005115.r4mat75wvlski3ij@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-04-30 16:20:07 -07:00
Alvaro Herrera
87259588d0 Fix tablespace inheritance for partitioned rels
Commit ca4103025d left a few loose ends.  The most important one
(broken pg_dump output) is already fixed by virtue of commit
3b23552ad8, but some things remained:

* When ALTER TABLE rewrites tables, the indexes must remain in the
  tablespace they were originally in.  This didn't work because
  index recreation during ALTER TABLE runs manufactured SQL (yuck),
  which runs afoul of default_tablespace in competition with the parent
  relation tablespace.  To fix, reset default_tablespace to the empty
  string temporarily, and add the TABLESPACE clause as appropriate.

* Setting a partitioned rel's tablespace to the database default is
  confusing; if it worked, it would direct the partitions to that
  tablespace regardless of default_tablespace.  But in reality it does
  not work, and making it work is a larger project.  Therefore, throw
  an error when this condition is detected, to alert the unwary.

Add some docs and tests, too.

Author: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f_1c260nOt_vBJ067AZ3JXptXVRohDVMLEBmudX1YEx-A@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-25 10:31:32 -04:00
Michael Paquier
148266fa35 Fix collection of typos and grammar mistakes in docs and comments
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190330224333.GQ5815@telsasoft.com
2019-04-19 16:57:40 +09:00
Andres Freund
f6b39171f3 docs: cleanup/remove/update references to OID column.
I (Andres) missed these in 578b229718.

Author: Justin Pryzby, editorialized a bit by Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Daniel Verite, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190408002847.GA904@telsasoft.com
2019-04-17 17:22:56 -07:00
Alvaro Herrera
421a2c4832 Tie loose ends in psql's new \dP command
* Remove one unnecessary pg_class join in SQL command.  Not needed,
  because we use a regclass cast instead.

* Doc: refer to "partitioned relations" rather than specifically tables,
  since indexes are also displayed.

* Rename "On table" column to "Table", for consistency with \di.

Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190407212525.GB10080@telsasoft.com
2019-04-17 18:38:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
64bbe10399 docs: clarify pg_upgrade's recovery behavior
The previous paragraph trying to explain --check, --link, and no --link
modes and the various points of failure was too complex.  Instead, use
bullet lists and sublists.

Reported-by: Daniel Gustafsson

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/qtqiv7hI87s_Xvz5ZXHCaH-1-_AZGpIDJowzlRjF3-AbCr3RhSNydM_JCuJ8DE4WZozrtxhIWmyYTbv0syKyfGB6cYMQitp9yN-NZMm-oAo=@yesql.se

Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-04-17 18:01:02 -04:00
Michael Paquier
a6dcf9df4d Rework handling of invalid indexes with REINDEX CONCURRENTLY
Per discussion with others, allowing REINDEX INDEX CONCURRENTLY to work
for invalid indexes when working directly on them can have a lot of
value to unlock situations with invalid indexes without having to use a
dance involving DROP INDEX followed by an extra CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY (which would not work for indexes with constraint
dependency anyway).  This also does not create extra bloat on the
relation involved as this works on individual indexes, so let's enable
it.

Note that REINDEX TABLE CONCURRENTLY still bypasses invalid indexes as
we don't want to bloat the number of indexes defined on a relation in
the event of multiple and successive failures of REINDEX CONCURRENTLY.

More regression tests are added to cover those behaviors, using an
invalid index created with CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY.

Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker, Álvaro Herrera
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190411134947.GA22043@alvherre.pgsql
2019-04-17 09:33:51 +09:00
Fujii Masao
c8e0f6bbdb Add index terms for reloptions in documentation.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-By: Alvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHyKt9-xkibVguPzYqKgb_2tdw14Ub1XDTu08kyHMiTQA@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-16 23:16:20 +09:00
Magnus Hagander
77bd49adba Show shared object statistics in pg_stat_database
This adds a row to the pg_stat_database view with datoid 0 and datname
NULL for those objects that are not in a database. This was added
particularly for checksums, but we were already tracking more satistics
for these objects, just not returning it.

Also add a checksum_last_failure column that holds the timestamptz of
the last checksum failure that occurred in a database (or in a
non-dataabase file), if any.

Author: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
2019-04-12 14:04:50 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
122fa9f942 doc: Fix whitespace
Author: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
2019-04-08 22:32:46 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
348f57ce5b doc: Add note about generated columns in foreign tables
Explain that it is not enforced that querying a generated column
returns data that is consistent with the data that was stored.  This
is similar to the note about constraints nearby.

Reported-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
2019-04-08 13:47:46 +02:00
Fujii Masao
119dcfad98 Add vacuum_truncate reloption.
vacuum_truncate controls whether vacuum tries to truncate off
any empty pages at the end of the table. Previously vacuum always
tried to do the truncation. However, the truncation could cause
some problems; for example, ACCESS EXCLUSIVE lock needs to
be taken on the table during the truncation and can cause
the query cancellation on the standby even if hot_standby_feedback
is true. Setting this reloption to false can be helpful to avoid
such problems.

Author: Tsunakawa Takayuki
Reviewed-By: Julien Rouhaud, Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier, Kirk Jamison and Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwE5UqFqSq1=kV3QtTUtXphTdyHA-8rAj4A=Y+e4kyp3BQ@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-08 16:43:57 +09:00
Michael Paquier
e3865c3754 Tweak wording of documentation for pg_checksums
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190329143210.GI5815@telsasoft.com
2019-04-08 15:30:45 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
1c5d9270e3 psql \dP: list partitioned tables and indexes
The new command lists partitioned relations (tables and/or indexes),
possibly with their sizes, possibly including partitioned partitions;
their parents (if not top-level); if indexes show the tables they belong
to; and their descriptions.

While there are various possible improvements to this, having it in this
form is already a great improvement over not having any way to obtain
this report.

Author: Pavel Stěhule, with help from Mathias Brossard, Amit Langote and
	Justin Pryzby.
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Mathias Brossard, Melanie Plageman,
	Michaël Paquier, Álvaro Herrera
2019-04-07 15:07:21 -04:00
Robert Haas
6665305e17 Fix missing word.
Nathan Bossart

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/2C63765B-AD31-4F6C-8DA7-C8544634C714@amazon.com
2019-04-05 15:25:09 -04:00
Andres Freund
86cc06d1cf table: docs: fix typos and grammar.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190404055138.GA24864@telsasoft.com
2019-04-05 09:47:10 -07:00
Etsuro Fujita
3e6b0c4729 Doc: Update documentation on partitioning vs. foreign tables.
The limitations that it is not allowed to create/attach a foreign table
as a partition of an indexed partitioned table were not documented.

Reported-By: Stepan Yankevych
Author: Etsuro Fujita
Reviewed-By: Amit Langote
Backpatch-through: 11 where partitioned index was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1553869152.858391073.5f8m3n0x@frv53.fwdcdn.com
2019-04-05 20:55:06 +09:00
Michael Paquier
bfc80683ce Fix some documentation in pg_rewind
Since 11, it is possible to use a non-superuser role when using an
online source cluster with pg_rewind as long as the role has proper
permissions to execute on the source all the functions used by
pg_rewind, and the documentation stated that a superuser is necessary.
Let's add at the same time all the details needed to create such a
role.

A second confusion which comes a lot from users is that it is necessary
to issue a checkpoint on a freshly-promoted standby so as its control
file has up-to-date timeline information which is used by pg_rewind to
validate the operation.  Let's document that properly.  This is
back-patched down to 9.5 where pg_rewind has been introduced.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEz5bpvbwVsYCaSMV80CBZ5-82nkMzbb+Bu=h1m=rLdn=g@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2019-04-05 10:37:59 +09:00
Tom Lane
7bac3acab4 Add a "SQLSTATE-only" error verbosity option to libpq and psql.
This is intended for use mostly in test scripts for external tools,
which could do without cross-PG-version variations in error message
wording.  Of course, the SQLSTATE isn't guaranteed stable either, but
it should be more so than the error message text.

Note: there's a bit of an ABI change for libpq here, but it seems
OK because if somebody compiles against a newer version of libpq-fe.h,
and then tries to pass PQERRORS_SQLSTATE to PQsetErrorVerbosity()
of an older libpq library, it will be accepted and then act like
PQERRORS_DEFAULT, thanks to the way the tests in pqBuildErrorMessage3
have historically been phrased.  That seems acceptable.

Didier Gautheron, reviewed by Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJRYxuKyj4zA+JGVrtx8OWAuBfE-_wN4sUMK4H49EuPed=mOBw@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 17:22:02 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
413ccaa74d pg_restore: Require "-f -" to mean stdout
The previous convention that stdout was selected by default when nothing
is specified was just too error-prone.

After a suggestion from Andrew Gierth.
Author: Euler Taveira
Reviewed-by: Yoshikazu Imai, José Arthur Benetasso Villanova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87sgwrmhdv.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
2019-04-04 16:54:15 -03:00
Robert Haas
a96c41feec Allow VACUUM to be run with index cleanup disabled.
This commit adds a new reloption, vacuum_index_cleanup, which
controls whether index cleanup is performed for a particular
relation by default.  It also adds a new option to the VACUUM
command, INDEX_CLEANUP, which can be used to override the
reloption.  If neither the reloption nor the VACUUM option is
used, the default is true, as before.

Masahiko Sawada, reviewed and tested by Nathan Bossart, Alvaro
Herrera, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Darafei Praliaskouski, and me.
The wording of the documentation is mostly due to me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAt5R3DNUZSjOoXDUY=naYPUOuffVsRzuTYMz29yLzQCA@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 15:04:43 -04:00
Andres Freund
b73c3a1196 tableam: basic documentation.
This adds documentation about the user oriented parts of table access
methods (i.e. the default_table_access_method GUC and the USING clause
for CREATE TABLE etc), adds a basic chapter about the table access
method interface, and adds a note to storage.sgml that it's contents
don't necessarily apply for non-builtin AMs.

Author: Haribabu Kommi and Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-04-03 17:40:29 -07:00
Tomas Vondra
ea569d64ac Add SETTINGS option to EXPLAIN, to print modified settings.
Query planning is affected by a number of configuration options, and it
may be crucial to know which of those options were set to non-default
values.  With this patch you can say EXPLAIN (SETTINGS ON) to include
that information in the query plan.  Only options affecting planning,
with values different from the built-in default are printed.

This patch also adds auto_explain.log_settings option, providing the
same capability in auto_explain module.

Author: Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih, John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e1791b4c-df9c-be02-edc5-7c8874944be0@2ndquadrant.com
2019-04-04 00:04:31 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera
f56f8f8da6 Support foreign keys that reference partitioned tables
Previously, while primary keys could be made on partitioned tables, it
was not possible to define foreign keys that reference those primary
keys.  Now it is possible to do that.

Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Jesper Pedersen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181102234158.735b3fevta63msbj@alvherre.pgsql
2019-04-03 14:40:21 -03:00
Michael Paquier
280e5f1405 Add progress reporting to pg_checksums
This adds a new option to pg_checksums called -P/--progress, showing
every second some information about the computation state of an
operation for --check and --enable (--disable only updates the control
file and is quick).  This requires a pre-scan of the data folder so as
the total size of checksummable items can be calculated, and then it
gets compared to the amount processed.

Similarly to what is done for pg_rewind and pg_basebackup, the
information printed in the progress report consists of the current
amount of data computed and the total amount of data to compute.  This
could be extended later on.

Author: Michael Banck, Bernd Helmle
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1535719851.1286.17.camel@credativ.de
2019-04-02 10:58:07 +09:00
Tom Lane
26a76cb640 Restrict pgbench's zipfian parameter to ensure good performance.
Remove the code that supported zipfian distribution parameters less
than 1.0, as it had undocumented performance hazards, and it's not
clear that the case is useful enough to justify either fixing or
documenting those hazards.

Also, since the code path for parameter > 1.0 could perform badly
for values very close to 1.0, establish a minimum allowed value
of 1.001.  This solution seems superior to the previous vague
documentation warning about small values not performing well.

Fabien Coelho, per a gripe from Tomas Vondra

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b5e172e9-ad22-48a3-86a3-589afa20e8f7@2ndquadrant.com
2019-04-01 17:37:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
cc8d415117 Unified logging system for command-line programs
This unifies the various ad hoc logging (message printing, error
printing) systems used throughout the command-line programs.

Features:

- Program name is automatically prefixed.

- Message string does not end with newline.  This removes a common
  source of inconsistencies and omissions.

- Additionally, a final newline is automatically stripped, simplifying
  use of PQerrorMessage() etc., another common source of mistakes.

- I converted error message strings to use %m where possible.

- As a result of the above several points, more translatable message
  strings can be shared between different components and between
  frontends and backend, without gratuitous punctuation or whitespace
  differences.

- There is support for setting a "log level".  This is not meant to be
  user-facing, but can be used internally to implement debug or
  verbose modes.

- Lazy argument evaluation, so no significant overhead if logging at
  some level is disabled.

- Some color in the messages, similar to gcc and clang.  Set
  PG_COLOR=auto to try it out.  Some colors are predefined, but can be
  customized by setting PG_COLORS.

- Common files (common/, fe_utils/, etc.) can handle logging much more
  simply by just using one API without worrying too much about the
  context of the calling program, requiring callbacks, or having to
  pass "progname" around everywhere.

- Some programs called setvbuf() to make sure that stderr is
  unbuffered, even on Windows.  But not all programs did that.  This
  is now done centrally.

Soft goals:

- Reduces vertical space use and visual complexity of error reporting
  in the source code.

- Encourages more deliberate classification of messages.  For example,
  in some cases it wasn't clear without analyzing the surrounding code
  whether a message was meant as an error or just an info.

- Concepts and terms are vaguely aligned with popular logging
  frameworks such as log4j and Python logging.

This is all just about printing stuff out.  Nothing affects program
flow (e.g., fatal exits).  The uses are just too varied to do that.
Some existing code had wrappers that do some kind of print-and-exit,
and I adapted those.

I tried to keep the output mostly the same, but there is a lot of
historical baggage to unwind and special cases to consider, and I
might not always have succeeded.  One significant change is that
pg_rewind used to write all error messages to stdout.  That is now
changed to stderr.

Reviewed-by: Donald Dong <xdong@csumb.edu>
Reviewed-by: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/6a609b43-4f57-7348-6480-bd022f924310@2ndquadrant.com
2019-04-01 20:01:35 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
ef6576f537 doc: Fix typo
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
2019-03-30 17:25:13 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
fc22b6623b Generated columns
This is an SQL-standard feature that allows creating columns that are
computed from expressions rather than assigned, similar to a view or
materialized view but on a column basis.

This implements one kind of generated column: stored (computed on
write).  Another kind, virtual (computed on read), is planned for the
future, and some room is left for it.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b151f851-4019-bdb1-699e-ebab07d2f40a@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-30 08:15:57 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
173268f4d0 doc: Small documentation review for REINDEX CONCURRENTLY
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzbyj@telsasoft.com>
2019-03-29 22:47:33 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
0267629e18 doc: Fix typo
Author: Bossart, Nathan <bossartn@amazon.com>
2019-03-29 22:41:19 +01:00
Michael Paquier
a7cc52370b Reorganize Notes section in documentation of pg_checksums
This commit reorders the paragraphs of the Notes section in order of
importance, and clarifies better the safe uses of pg_checksums for
replication setups.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1903231404280.18811@lancre
2019-03-29 23:00:51 +09:00
Robert Haas
41b54ba78e Allow existing VACUUM options to take a Boolean argument.
This makes VACUUM work more like EXPLAIN already does without changing
the meaning of any commands that already work.  It is intended to
facilitate the addition of future VACUUM options that may take
non-Boolean parameters or that default to false.

Masahiko Sawada, reviewed by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobpYrXr5sUaEe_T0boabV0DSm=utSOZzwCUNqfLEEm8Mw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoBaFcKBAeL5_++j+Vzir2vBBcF4juW7qH8b3HsQY=Q6+w@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-29 08:22:49 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5dc92b844e REINDEX CONCURRENTLY
This adds the CONCURRENTLY option to the REINDEX command.  A REINDEX
CONCURRENTLY on a specific index creates a new index (like CREATE
INDEX CONCURRENTLY), then renames the old index away and the new index
in place and adjusts the dependencies, and then drops the old
index (like DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY).  The REINDEX command also has
the capability to run its other variants (TABLE, DATABASE) with the
CONCURRENTLY option (but not SYSTEM).

The reindexdb command gets the --concurrently option.

Author: Michael Paquier, Andreas Karlsson, Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Fujii Masao, Jim Nasby, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/60052986-956b-4478-45ed-8bd119e9b9cf%402ndquadrant.com#74948a1044c56c5e817a5050f554ddee
2019-03-29 08:26:33 +01:00
Tomas Vondra
7300a69950 Add support for multivariate MCV lists
Introduce a third extended statistic type, supported by the CREATE
STATISTICS command - MCV lists, a generalization of the statistic
already built and used for individual columns.

Compared to the already supported types (n-distinct coefficients and
functional dependencies), MCV lists are more complex, include column
values and allow estimation of much wider range of common clauses
(equality and inequality conditions, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL etc.).
Similarly to the other types, a new pseudo-type (pg_mcv_list) is used.

Author: Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Mark Dilger, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dfdac334-9cf2-2597-fb27-f0fb3753f435@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-27 18:32:18 +01:00
Michael Paquier
ecfed4a122 Improve error handling of column references in expression transformation
Column references are not allowed in default expressions and partition
bound expressions, and are restricted as such once the transformation of
their expressions is done.  However, trying to use more complex column
references can lead to confusing error messages.  For example, trying to
use a two-field column reference name for default expressions and
partition bounds leads to "missing FROM-clause entry for table", which
makes no sense in their respective context.

In order to make the errors generated more useful, this commit adds more
verbose messages when transforming column references depending on the
context.  This has a little consequence though: for example an
expression using an aggregate with a column reference as argument would
cause an error to be generated for the column reference, while the
aggregate was the problem reported before this commit because column
references get transformed first.

The confusion exists for default expressions for a long time, and the
problem is new as of v12 for partition bounds.  Still per the lack of
complaints on the matter no backpatch is done.

The patch has been written by Amit Langote and me, and Tom Lane has
provided the improvement of the documentation for default expressions on
the CREATE TABLE page.

Author: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190326020853.GM2558@paquier.xyz
2019-03-27 21:04:25 +09:00
Tom Lane
b3bd819632 Doc: clarify that REASSIGN OWNED doesn't handle default privileges.
It doesn't touch regular privileges either, but only the latter was
explicitly stated.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/155348282848.9808.12629518043813943231@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2019-03-25 17:18:05 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
25ee70511e pgbench: Remove \cset
Partial revert of commit 6260cc550b, "pgbench: add \cset and \gset
commands".

While \gset is widely considered a useful and necessary tool for user-
defined benchmarks, \cset does not have as much value, and its
implementation was considered "not to be up to project standards"
(though I, Álvaro, can't quite understand exactly how).  Therefore,
remove \cset.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1903230716030.18811@lancre
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/201901101900.mv7zduch6sad@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-25 12:16:07 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
280a408b48 Transaction chaining
Add command variants COMMIT AND CHAIN and ROLLBACK AND CHAIN, which
start new transactions with the same transaction characteristics as the
just finished one, per SQL standard.

Support for transaction chaining in PL/pgSQL is also added.  This
functionality is especially useful when running COMMIT in a loop in
PL/pgSQL.

Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/28536681-324b-10dc-ade8-ab46f7645a5a@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-24 11:33:02 +01:00
Michael Paquier
e0090c8690 Add option -N/--no-sync to pg_checksums
This is an option consistent with what pg_dump, pg_rewind and
pg_basebackup provide which is useful for leveraging the I/O effort when
testing things, not to be used in a production environment.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck, Fabien Coelho, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-23 08:37:36 +09:00
Michael Paquier
ed308d7837 Add options to enable and disable checksums in pg_checksums
An offline cluster can now work with more modes in pg_checksums:
- --enable enables checksums in a cluster, updating all blocks with a
correct checksum, and updating the control file at the end.
- --disable disables checksums in a cluster, updating only the control
file.
- --check is an extra option able to verify checksums for a cluster, and
the default used if no mode is specified.

When running --enable or --disable, the data folder gets fsync'd for
durability, and then it is followed by a control file update and flush
to keep the operation consistent should the tool be interrupted, killed
or the host unplugged.  If no mode is specified in the options, then
--check is used for compatibility with older versions of pg_checksums
(named pg_verify_checksums in v11 where it was introduced).

Author: Michael Banck, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Magnus Hagander, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-23 08:12:55 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
5e1963fb76 Collations with nondeterministic comparison
This adds a flag "deterministic" to collations.  If that is false,
such a collation disables various optimizations that assume that
strings are equal only if they are byte-wise equal.  That then allows
use cases such as case-insensitive or accent-insensitive comparisons
or handling of strings with different Unicode normal forms.

This functionality is only supported with the ICU provider.  At least
glibc doesn't appear to have any locales that work in a
nondeterministic way, so it's not worth supporting this for the libc
provider.

The term "deterministic comparison" in this context is from Unicode
Technical Standard #10
(https://unicode.org/reports/tr10/#Deterministic_Comparison).

This patch makes changes in three areas:

- CREATE COLLATION DDL changes and system catalog changes to support
  this new flag.

- Many executor nodes and auxiliary code are extended to track
  collations.  Previously, this code would just throw away collation
  information, because the eventually-called user-defined functions
  didn't use it since they only cared about equality, which didn't
  need collation information.

- String data type functions that do equality comparisons and hashing
  are changed to take the (non-)deterministic flag into account.  For
  comparison, this just means skipping various shortcuts and tie
  breakers that use byte-wise comparison.  For hashing, we first need
  to convert the input string to a canonical "sort key" using the ICU
  analogue of strxfrm().

Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1ccc668f-4cbc-0bef-af67-450b47cdfee7@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-22 12:12:43 +01:00
Andrew Gierth
01bde4fa4c Implement OR REPLACE option for CREATE AGGREGATE.
Aggregates have acquired a dozen or so optional attributes in recent
years for things like parallel query and moving-aggregate mode; the
lack of an OR REPLACE option to add or change these for an existing
agg makes extension upgrades gratuitously hard. Rectify.
2019-03-19 01:16:50 +00:00
Amit Kapila
13e8643bfc During pg_upgrade, conditionally skip transfer of FSMs.
If a heap on the old cluster has 4 pages or fewer, and the old cluster
was PG v11 or earlier, don't copy or link the FSM. This will shrink
space usage for installations with large numbers of small tables.

This will allow pg_upgrade to take advantage of commit b0eaa4c51b where
we have avoided creation of the free space map for small heap relations.

Author: John Naylor
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACPNZCu4cOdm3uGnNEGXivy7Gz8UWyQjynDpdkPGabQ18_zK6g%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-15 08:25:57 +05:30
Robert Haas
bbb96c3704 Allow ALTER TABLE .. SET NOT NULL to skip provably unnecessary scans.
If existing CHECK or NOT NULL constraints preclude the presence
of nulls, we need not look to see whether any are present.

Sergei Kornilov, reviewed by Stephen Frost, Ildar Musin, David Rowley,
and by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/81911511895540@web58j.yandex.ru
2019-03-13 08:55:00 -04:00
Michael Paquier
6dd263cfaa Rename pg_verify_checksums to pg_checksums
The current tool name is too restrictive and focuses only on verifying
checksums.  As more options to control checksums for an offline cluster
are planned to be added, switch to a more generic name.  Documentation
as well as all past references to the tool are updated.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck, Fabien Coelho, Seigei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-13 10:43:20 +09:00
Andrew Dunstan
a478415281 pgbench: increase the maximum number of variables/arguments
pgbench's arbitrary limit of 10 arguments for SQL statements or
metacommands is far too low. Increase it to 256.

This results in a very modest increase in memory usage, not enough to
worry about.

The maximum includes the SQL statement or metacommand. This is reflected
in the comments and revised TAP tests.

Simon Riggs and Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker with some light editing by me.
Reviewed by: David Rowley and Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jJiMJOAf-dLoHuR-8GENiK+eHTY=Omw38Qx7j2g0NDTXA@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-11 13:18:37 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
fc84c05acd Fix documentation on partitioning vs. foreign tables
1. The PARTITION OF clause of CREATE FOREIGN TABLE was not explained in
   the CREATE FOREIGN TABLE reference page.  Add it.
   (Postgres 10 onwards)

2. The limitation that tuple routing cannot target partitions that are
   foreign tables was not documented clearly enough.  Improve wording.
   (Postgres 10 onwards)

3. The UPDATE tuple re-routing concurrency behavior was explained in
   the DDL chapter, which doesn't seem the right place.  Move it to the
   UPDATE reference page instead.  (Postgres 11 onwards).

Authors: Amit Langote, David Rowley.
Reviewed-by: Etsuro Fujita.
Reported-by: Derek Hans
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGrP7a3Xc1Qy_B2WJcgAD8uQTS_NDcJn06O5mtS_Ne1nYhBsyw@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-10 19:45:29 -03:00
Tom Lane
caf626b2cd Convert [autovacuum_]vacuum_cost_delay into floating-point GUCs.
This change makes it possible to specify sub-millisecond delays,
which work well on most modern platforms, though that was not true
when the cost-delay feature was designed.

To support this without breaking existing configuration entries,
improve guc.c to allow floating-point GUCs to have units.  Also,
allow "us" (microseconds) as an input/output unit for time-unit GUCs.
(It's not allowed as a base unit, at least not yet.)

Likewise change the autovacuum_vacuum_cost_delay reloption to be
floating-point; this forces a catversion bump because the layout of
StdRdOptions changes.

This patch doesn't in itself change the default values or allowed
ranges for these parameters, and it should not affect the behavior
for any already-allowed setting for them.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1798.1552165479@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-03-10 15:01:39 -04:00
Alexander Korotkov
f2e403803f Support for INCLUDE attributes in GiST indexes
Similarly to B-tree, GiST index access method gets support of INCLUDE
attributes.  These attributes aren't used for tree navigation and aren't
present in non-leaf pages.  But they are present in leaf pages and can be
fetched during index-only scan.

The point of having INCLUDE attributes in GiST indexes is slightly different
from the point of having them in B-tree.  The main point of INCLUDE attributes
in B-tree is to define UNIQUE constraint over part of attributes enabled for
index-only scan.  In GiST the main point of INCLUDE attributes is to use
index-only scan for attributes, whose data types don't have GiST opclasses.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/73A1A452-AD5F-40D4-BD61-978622FF75C1%40yandex-team.ru
Author: Andrey Borodin, with small changes by me
Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson
2019-03-10 11:37:17 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera
7e413a0f82 pg_dump: allow multiple rows per insert
This is useful to speed up loading data in a different database engine.

Authors: Surafel Temesgen and David Rowley.  Lightly edited by Álvaro.
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q9kumSdnRBzvRJvSRf2+BH20YmSvzqOkvwpEmodD-xv6g@mail.gmail.com
2019-03-07 09:34:17 -03:00
Andres Freund
8586bf7ed8 tableam: introduce table AM infrastructure.
This introduces the concept of table access methods, i.e. CREATE
  ACCESS METHOD ... TYPE TABLE and
  CREATE TABLE ... USING (storage-engine).
No table access functionality is delegated to table AMs as of this
commit, that'll be done in following commits.

Subsequent commits will incrementally abstract table access
functionality to be routed through table access methods. That change
is too large to be reviewed & committed at once, so it'll be done
incrementally.

Docs will be updated at the end, as adding them incrementally would
likely make them less coherent, and definitely is a lot more work,
without a lot of benefit.

Table access methods are specified similar to index access methods,
i.e. pg_am.amhandler returns, as INTERNAL, a pointer to a struct with
callbacks. In contrast to index AMs that struct needs to live as long
as a backend, typically that's achieved by just returning a pointer to
a constant struct.

Psql's \d+ now displays a table's access method. That can be disabled
with HIDE_TABLEAM=true, which is mainly useful so regression tests can
be run against different AMs.  It's quite possible that this behaviour
still needs to be fine tuned.

For now it's not allowed to set a table AM for a partitioned table, as
we've not resolved how partitions would inherit that. Disallowing
allows us to introduce, if we decide that's the way forward, such a
behaviour without a compatibility break.

Catversion bumped, to add the heap table AM and references to it.

Author: Haribabu Kommi, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Dimitri Golgov and others
Discussion:
    https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
    https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
    https://postgr.es/m/20190107235616.6lur25ph22u5u5av@alap3.anarazel.de
    https://postgr.es/m/20190304234700.w5tmhducs5wxgzls@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-03-06 09:54:38 -08:00
Andrew Dunstan
f092de0503 Add --exclude-database option to pg_dumpall
This option functions similarly to pg_dump's --exclude-table option, but
for database names. The option can be given once, and the argument can
be a pattern including wildcard characters.

Author: Andrew Dunstan.
Reviewd-by: Fabien Coelho and Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/43a54a47-4aa7-c70e-9ca6-648f436dd6e6@2ndQuadrant.com
2019-03-01 10:47:44 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
2c31825fb9 Improve docs for ALTER TABLE .. SET TABLESPACE
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190220173815.GA7959@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
2019-02-28 19:24:21 -03:00
Andrew Dunstan
af25bc03e1 Provide an extra-float-digits setting for pg_dump / pg_dumpall
Changes made by commit 02ddd49 mean that dumps made against pre version
12 instances are no longer comparable with those made against version 12
or later instances. This makes cross-version upgrade testing fail in the
buildfarm. Experimentation has shown that the error is cured if the
dumps are made when extra_float_digits is set to 0. Hence this patch
allows for it to be explicitly set rather than relying on pg_dump's
builtin default (3 in almost all cases). This feature might have other
uses, but should not normally be used.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c76f7051-8fd3-ec10-7579-1f8842305b85@2ndQuadrant.com
2019-02-18 07:37:07 -05:00
Tom Lane
608b167f9f Allow user control of CTE materialization, and change the default behavior.
Historically we've always materialized the full output of a CTE query,
treating WITH as an optimization fence (so that, for example, restrictions
from the outer query cannot be pushed into it).  This is appropriate when
the CTE query is INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE, or is recursive; but when the CTE
query is non-recursive and side-effect-free, there's no hazard of changing
the query results by pushing restrictions down.

Another argument for materialization is that it can avoid duplicate
computation of an expensive WITH query --- but that only applies if
the WITH query is called more than once in the outer query.  Even then
it could still be a net loss, if each call has restrictions that
would allow just a small part of the WITH query to be computed.

Hence, let's change the behavior for WITH queries that are non-recursive
and side-effect-free.  By default, we will inline them into the outer
query (removing the optimization fence) if they are called just once.
If they are called more than once, we will keep the old behavior by
default, but the user can override this and force inlining by specifying
NOT MATERIALIZED.  Lastly, the user can force the old behavior by
specifying MATERIALIZED; this would mainly be useful when the query had
deliberately been employing WITH as an optimization fence to prevent a
poor choice of plan.

Andreas Karlsson, Andrew Gierth, David Fetter

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87sh48ffhb.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
2019-02-16 16:11:12 -05:00
Tom Lane
1fb57af920 Create the infrastructure for planner support functions.
Rename/repurpose pg_proc.protransform as "prosupport".  The idea is
still that it names an internal function that provides knowledge to
the planner about the behavior of the function it's attached to;
but redesign the API specification so that it's not limited to doing
just one thing, but can support an extensible set of requests.

The original purpose of simplifying a function call is handled by
the first request type to be invented, SupportRequestSimplify.
Adjust all the existing transform functions to handle this API,
and rename them fron "xxx_transform" to "xxx_support" to reflect
the potential generalization of what they do.  (Since we never
previously provided any way for extensions to add transform functions,
this change doesn't create an API break for them.)

Also add DDL and pg_dump support for attaching a support function to a
user-defined function.  Unfortunately, DDL access has to be restricted
to superusers, at least for now; but seeing that support functions
will pretty much have to be written in C, that limitation is just
theoretical.  (This support is untested in this patch, but a follow-on
patch will add cases that exercise it.)

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15193.1548028093@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-02-09 18:08:48 -05:00
Michael Paquier
be12aa47e6 Clarify behavior of initdb's --allow-group-access on Windows in docs
The option is ignored on Windows, and GUC data_directory_mode already
mentioned that within its description in the documentation.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reported-by: Haribabu Kommi, David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJrrPGefxTG43yk6BrOC7ZcMnCTccG9+inCSncvyys_t8Ev9cQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 11
2019-02-04 09:57:20 +09:00
Michael Paquier
00d1e88d36 Add --min-xid-age and --min-mxid-age options to vacuumdb
These two new options can be used to improve the selectivity of
relations to vacuum or analyze even further depending on the age of
respectively their transaction ID or multixact ID, so as it is possible
to prioritize tables to prevent wraparound of one or the other.
Combined with --table, it is possible to target a subset of tables to
choose as potential processing targets.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
2019-01-31 13:07:56 +09:00
Magnus Hagander
9745b528f7 Improve wording about WAL files in tar mode of pg_basebackup
Author: Alex Kliukin
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, Magnus Hagander
2019-01-29 10:42:41 +01:00
Tom Lane
6d3ede5f1c Fix psql's "\g target" meta-command to work with COPY TO STDOUT.
Previously, \g would successfully execute the COPY command, but
the target specification if any was ignored, so that the data was
always dumped to the regular query output target.  This seems like
a clear bug, so let's not just fix it but back-patch it.

While at it, adjust the documentation for \copy to recommend
"COPY ... TO STDOUT \g foo" as a plausible alternative.

Back-patch to 9.5.  The problem exists much further back, but the
code associated with \g was refactored enough in 9.5 that we'd
need a significantly different patch for 9.4, and it doesn't
seem worth the trouble.

Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15dadc39-e050-4d46-956b-dcc4ed098753@manitou-mail.org
2019-01-26 14:15:42 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
7c079d7417 Allow generalized expression syntax for partition bounds
Previously, only literals were allowed.  This change allows general
expressions, including functions calls, which are evaluated at the
time the DDL command is executed.

Besides offering some more functionality, it simplifies the parser
structures and removes some inconsistencies in how the literals were
handled.

Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Tom Lane, Amit Langote
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9f88b5e0-6da2-5227-20d0-0d7012beaa1c@lab.ntt.co.jp/
2019-01-25 11:28:49 +01:00
Tom Lane
e6c3ba7fbf Fix portability problem in pgbench.
The pgbench regression test supposed that srandom() with a specific value
would result in deterministic output from random(), as required by POSIX.
It emerges however that OpenBSD is too smart to be constrained by mere
standards, so their random() emits nondeterministic output anyway.
While a workaround does exist, what seems like a better fix is to stop
relying on the platform's srandom()/random() altogether, so that what
you get from --random-seed=N is not merely deterministic but platform
independent.  Hence, use a separate pg_jrand48() random sequence in
place of random().

Also adjust the regression test case that's supposed to detect
nondeterminism so that it's more likely to detect it; the original
choice of random_zipfian parameter tended to produce the same output
all the time even if the underlying behavior wasn't deterministic.

In passing, improve pgbench's docs about random_zipfian().

Back-patch to v11 where this code was introduced.

Fabien Coelho and Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4615.1547792324@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-01-24 11:31:54 -05:00
Michael Paquier
efab708997 Adjust documentation for vacuumdb --disable-page-skipping
This makes the description more consistent with the other options, and
the mapping with VACUUM is intuitive.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
2019-01-22 11:21:07 +09:00
Tomas Vondra
31f3817402 Allow COPY FROM to filter data using WHERE conditions
Extends the COPY FROM command with a WHERE condition, which allows doing
various types of filtering while importing the data (random sampling,
condition on a data column, etc.).  Until now such filtering required
either preprocessing of the input data, or importing all data and then
filtering in the database. COPY FROM ... WHERE is an easy-to-use and
low-overhead alternative for most simple cases.

Author: Surafel Temesgen
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Masahiko Sawada, Lim Myungkyu
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CALAY4q_DdpWDuB5-Zyi-oTtO2uSk8pmy+dupiRe3AvAc++1imA@mail.gmail.com
2019-01-20 00:22:14 +01:00
Michael Paquier
c5660e0aa5 Restrict the use of temporary namespace in two-phase transactions
Attempting to use a temporary table within a two-phase transaction is
forbidden for ages.  However, there have been uncovered grounds for
a couple of other object types and commands which work on temporary
objects with two-phase commit.  In short, trying to create, lock or drop
an object on a temporary schema should not be authorized within a
two-phase transaction, as it would cause its state to create
dependencies with other sessions, causing all sorts of side effects with
the existing session or other sessions spawned later on trying to use
the same temporary schema name.

Regression tests are added to cover all the grounds found, the original
report mentioned function creation, but monitoring closer there are many
other patterns with LOCK, DROP or CREATE EXTENSION which are involved.
One of the symptoms resulting in combining both is that the session
which used the temporary schema is not able to shut down completely,
waiting for being able to drop the temporary schema, something that it
cannot complete because of the two-phase transaction involved with
temporary objects.  In this case the client is able to disconnect but
the session remains alive on the backend-side, potentially blocking
connection backend slots from being used.  Other problems reported could
also involve server crashes.

This is back-patched down to v10, which is where 9b013dc has introduced
MyXactFlags, something that this patch relies on.

Reported-by: Alexey Bashtanov
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5d910e2e-0db8-ec06-dd5f-baec420513c3@imap.cc
Backpatch-through: 10
2019-01-18 09:21:44 +09:00
Tatsuo Ishii
2472ea0a53 Doc: enhance pgbench manual.
Clarify the difference between "prepared mode" and other query modes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181030.103654.2249812451112831300.t-ishii@sraoss.co.jp
Reviewed by: Fabien Coelh and Alvaro Herrera.
2019-01-17 15:34:41 +09:00
Michael Paquier
42e2a58071 Fix typos in documentation and for one wait event
These have been found while cross-checking for the use of unique words
in the documentation, and a wait event was not getting generated in a way
consistent to what the documentation provided.

Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9b5a3a85-899a-ae62-dbab-1e7943aa5ab1@gmail.com
2019-01-15 08:47:01 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
6260cc550b pgbench: add \cset and \gset commands
These commands allow assignment of values produced by queries to pgbench
variables, where they can be used by further commands.  \gset terminates
a command sequence (just like a bare semicolon); \cset separates
multiple queries in a compound command, like an escaped semicolon (\;).
A prefix can be provided to the \-command and is prepended to the name
of each output column to produce the final variable name.

This feature allows pgbench scripts to react meaningfully to the actual
database contents, allowing more powerful benchmarks to be written.

Authors: Fabien Coelho, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Stephen Frost <sfrost@snowman.net>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Tatsuo Ishii <ishii@sraoss.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.sabih@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1607091005330.3412@sto
2019-01-10 13:42:20 -03:00
Michael Paquier
354e95d1f2 Add --disable-page-skipping and --skip-locked to vacuumdb
DISABLE_PAGE_SKIPPING is available since v9.6, and SKIP_LOCKED since
v12.  They lacked equivalents for vacuumdb, so this closes the gap.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
2019-01-08 10:52:29 +09:00
Michael Paquier
f7ea1a4233 Clarify referential actions in docs of CREATE/ALTER TABLE
The documentation of ON DELETE and ON UPDATE uses the term "action",
which is also used on the ALTER TABLE page for other purposes.  This
commit renames the term to "referential_action", which is more
consistent with the SQL specification.  The new term is now used on the
documentation of both CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE for consistency.

Reported-by: Brigitte Blanc-Lafay
Author: Lætitia Avrot
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB_COdiHEVVs0uB+uYCjjYUwQ4YFFekppq+Xqv6qAM8+cd42gA@mail.gmail.com
2018-12-28 10:19:14 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
ca4103025d Fix tablespace handling for partitioned tables
When partitioned tables were introduced, we failed to realize that by
copying the tablespace handling for other relation kinds with no
physical storage we were causing the secondary effect that their
partitions would not automatically inherit the tablespace setting.  This
is surprising and unhelpful, so change it to adopt the behavior
introduced in pg11 (commit 33e6c34c32) for partitioned indexes: the
parent relation remembers the tablespace specification, which is then
used for any new partitions that don't declare one.

Because this commit changes behavior of the TABLESPACE clause for
partitioned tables (it's no longer a no-op), it is not backpatched.

Author: David Rowley, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f9SxVzqDrGD1teosFd6jBMM0UEaa14_8mRvcWE19Tu0hA@mail.gmail.com
2018-12-17 15:37:40 -03:00
Tom Lane
d65ddb2b56 Doc: improve documentation about ALTER LARGE OBJECT requirements.
Unlike other ALTER ref pages, this one neglected to mention that
ALTER OWNER requires being a member of the new owning role.
Per bug #15546 from Stefan Kadow.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15546-0558c75fd2025e7c@postgresql.org
2018-12-11 11:21:36 -05:00
Tom Lane
1f66c657f2 Doc: document that we expect CHECK constraint conditions to be immutable.
This restriction is implicit in the check-only-once implementation we use
for table and domain constraints, but it wasn't spelled out anywhere, nor
was there any advice about how to alter a constraint's behavior safely.
Improve that.

I was also dissatisfied with the documentation of ALTER DOMAIN VALIDATE
CONSTRAINT, which entirely failed to explain the use of that feature; and
thence decided that ALTER TABLE VALIDATE CONSTRAINT could be documented
better as well.

Perhaps we should back-patch this, along with the related commit 36d442a25,
but for now I refrained.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/12539.1544107316@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-12-07 16:40:58 -05:00
Tom Lane
1464755fc4 Doc: remove obsolete statements about system OID columns in ALTER TABLE.
Missed in commit 578b22971.
2018-12-07 14:50:46 -05:00
Tom Lane
afc4a78a30 Refactor documentation about privileges to centralize the info.
Expand section 5.6 "Privileges" to include the full definition of
each privilege type, and an explanation of aclitem privilege displays,
along with some helpful summary tables.  Most of this material came
out of the GRANT reference page, although some of it is new.
Adjust a bunch of links that were pointing to GRANT to point to 5.6.

Fabien Coelho and Tom Lane, reviewed by Bradley DeJong

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1807311735200.20743@lancre
2018-12-03 11:40:49 -05:00
Tom Lane
2d34ad8430 Add a --socketdir option to pg_upgrade.
This allows control of the directory in which the postmaster sockets
are created for the temporary postmasters started by pg_upgrade.
The default location remains the current working directory, which is
typically fine, but if it is deeply nested then its pathname might
be too long to be a socket name.

In passing, clean up some messiness in pg_upgrade's option handling,
particularly the confusing and undocumented way that configuration-only
datadirs were handled.  And fix check_required_directory's substantially
under-baked cleanup of directory pathnames.

Daniel Gustafsson, reviewed by Hironobu Suzuki, some code cleanup by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E72DD5C3-2268-48A5-A907-ED4B34BEC223@yesql.se
2018-12-01 15:45:11 -05:00
Tom Lane
aa2ba50c2c Add CSV table output mode in psql.
"\pset format csv", or --csv, selects comma-separated values table format.
This is compliant with RFC 4180, except that we aren't too picky about
whether the record separator is LF or CRLF; also, the user may choose a
field separator other than comma.

This output format is directly compatible with the server's COPY CSV
format, and will also be useful as input to other programs.  It's
considerably safer for that purpose than the old recommendation to
use "unaligned" format, since the latter couldn't handle data
containing the field separator character.

Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Fabien Coelho and David Fetter, some
tweaking by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a8de371e-006f-4f92-ab72-2bbe3ee78f03@manitou-mail.org
2018-11-26 15:18:55 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
36d442a25a Clarify that cross-row constraints are unsupported
Maybe we'll implement them later, or maybe not, but let's make the statu
quo clear for now.

Author: Lætitia Avrot, Patrick Francelle
Reviewers: too many to list
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB_COdhUuzNFOJfc7SNNso5rOuVA3ui93KMVunEM8Yih+K5A6A@mail.gmail.com
2018-11-26 12:38:19 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
2dedf4d9a8 Integrate recovery.conf into postgresql.conf
recovery.conf settings are now set in postgresql.conf (or other GUC
sources).  Currently, all the affected settings are PGC_POSTMASTER;
this could be refined in the future case by case.

Recovery is now initiated by a file recovery.signal.  Standby mode is
initiated by a file standby.signal.  The standby_mode setting is
gone.  If a recovery.conf file is found, an error is issued.

The trigger_file setting has been renamed to promote_trigger_file as
part of the move.

The documentation chapter "Recovery Configuration" has been integrated
into "Server Configuration".

pg_basebackup -R now appends settings to postgresql.auto.conf and
creates a standby.signal file.

Author: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Abhijit Menon-Sen <ams@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/607741529606767@web3g.yandex.ru/
2018-11-25 16:33:40 +01:00
Michael Paquier
d392e9bdea Clarify documentation about PASSWORD in CREATE/ALTER ROLE
The documentation of CREATE/ALTER ROLE has been missing two things
related to PASSWORD:
- The password value provided needs to be quoted, some places of the
documentation marked the field with quotes, but not others, which led to
confusion.
- PASSWORD NULL was not provided consistently, with ENCRYPTED being not
compatible with it.

Reported-by: Steven Winfield
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/154282901979.1316.7418475422120496802@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-11-23 09:10:24 +09:00
Andres Freund
578b229718 Remove WITH OIDS support, change oid catalog column visibility.
Previously tables declared WITH OIDS, including a significant fraction
of the catalog tables, stored the oid column not as a normal column,
but as part of the tuple header.

This special column was not shown by default, which was somewhat odd,
as it's often (consider e.g. pg_class.oid) one of the more important
parts of a row.  Neither pg_dump nor COPY included the contents of the
oid column by default.

The fact that the oid column was not an ordinary column necessitated a
significant amount of special case code to support oid columns. That
already was painful for the existing, but upcoming work aiming to make
table storage pluggable, would have required expanding and duplicating
that "specialness" significantly.

WITH OIDS has been deprecated since 2005 (commit ff02d0a05280e0).
Remove it.

Removing includes:
- CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE syntax for declaring the table to be
  WITH OIDS has been removed (WITH (oids[ = true]) will error out)
- pg_dump does not support dumping tables declared WITH OIDS and will
  issue a warning when dumping one (and ignore the oid column).
- restoring an pg_dump archive with pg_restore will warn when
  restoring a table with oid contents (and ignore the oid column)
- COPY will refuse to load binary dump that includes oids.
- pg_upgrade will error out when encountering tables declared WITH
  OIDS, they have to be altered to remove the oid column first.
- Functionality to access the oid of the last inserted row (like
  plpgsql's RESULT_OID, spi's SPI_lastoid, ...) has been removed.

The syntax for declaring a table WITHOUT OIDS (or WITH (oids = false)
for CREATE TABLE) is still supported. While that requires a bit of
support code, it seems unnecessary to break applications / dumps that
do not use oids, and are explicit about not using them.

The biggest user of WITH OID columns was postgres' catalog. This
commit changes all 'magic' oid columns to be columns that are normally
declared and stored. To reduce unnecessary query breakage all the
newly added columns are still named 'oid', even if a table's column
naming scheme would indicate 'reloid' or such.  This obviously
requires adapting a lot code, mostly replacing oid access via
HeapTupleGetOid() with access to the underlying Form_pg_*->oid column.

The bootstrap process now assigns oids for all oid columns in
genbki.pl that do not have an explicit value (starting at the largest
oid previously used), only oids assigned later by oids will be above
FirstBootstrapObjectId. As the oid column now is a normal column the
special bootstrap syntax for oids has been removed.

Oids are not automatically assigned during insertion anymore, all
backend code explicitly assigns oids with GetNewOidWithIndex(). For
the rare case that insertions into the catalog via SQL are called for
the new pg_nextoid() function can be used (which only works on catalog
tables).

The fact that oid columns on system tables are now normal columns
means that they will be included in the set of columns expanded
by * (i.e. SELECT * FROM pg_class will now include the table's oid,
previously it did not). It'd not technically be hard to hide oid
column by default, but that'd mean confusing behavior would either
have to be carried forward forever, or it'd cause breakage down the
line.

While it's not unlikely that further adjustments are needed, the
scope/invasiveness of the patch makes it worthwhile to get merge this
now. It's painful to maintain externally, too complicated to commit
after the code code freeze, and a dependency of a number of other
patches.

Catversion bump, for obvious reasons.

Author: Andres Freund, with contributions by John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180930034810.ywp2c7awz7opzcfr@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-11-20 16:00:17 -08:00
Peter Eisentraut
69bae23727 doc: Clarify CREATE TYPE ENUM documentation
The documentation claimed that an enum type requires "one or more"
labels, but since 1fd9883ff4, zero labels are also allowed.

Reported-by: Lukas Eder <lukas.eder@gmail.com>
Bug: #15356
2018-11-20 09:37:02 +01:00
Alvaro Herrera
5c9a5513a3 Disallow COPY FREEZE on partitioned tables
This didn't actually work: COPY would fail to flush the right files, and
instead would try to flush a non-existing file, causing the whole
transaction to fail.

Cope by raising an error as soon as the command is sent instead, to
avoid a nasty later surprise.  Of course, it would be much better to
make it work, but we don't have a patch for that yet, and we don't know
if we'll want to backpatch one when we do.

Reported-by: Tomas Vondra
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Steve Singer, Tomas Vondra
2018-11-19 11:16:28 -03:00
Tom Lane
51eaaafb85 Doc: remove claim that all \pset format options are unique in 1 letter.
This hasn't been correct since 9.3 added "latex-longtable".

I left the phraseology "Unique abbreviations are allowed" alone.
It's correct as far as it goes, and we are studiously refraining
from specifying exactly what happens if you give a non-unique
abbreviation.  (The answer in the back branches is "you get a
backwards-compatible choice", and the answer in HEAD will shortly
be "you get an error", but there seems no need to mention such
details here.)

Daniel Vérité

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cb7e1caf-3ea6-450d-af28-f524903a030c@manitou-mail.org
2018-11-14 16:29:57 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
1b5d797cd4 Lower lock level for renaming indexes
Change lock level for renaming index (either ALTER INDEX or implicitly
via some other commands) from AccessExclusiveLock to
ShareUpdateExclusiveLock.

One reason we need a strong lock for relation renaming is that the
name change causes a rebuild of the relcache entry.  Concurrent
sessions that have the relation open might not be able to handle the
relcache entry changing underneath them.  Therefore, we need to lock
the relation in a way that no one can have the relation open
concurrently.  But for indexes, the relcache handles reloads specially
in RelationReloadIndexInfo() in a way that keeps changes in the
relcache entry to a minimum.  As long as no one keeps pointers to
rd_amcache and rd_options around across possible relcache flushes,
which is the case, this ought to be safe.

We also want to use a self-exclusive lock for correctness, so that
concurrent DDL doesn't overwrite the rename if they start updating
while still seeing the old version.  Therefore, we use
ShareUpdateExclusiveLock, which is already used by other DDL commands
that want to operate in a concurrent manner.

The reason this is interesting at all is that renaming an index is a
typical part of a concurrent reindexing workflow (CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY new + DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY old + rename back).  And
indeed a future built-in REINDEX CONCURRENTLY might rely on the ability
to do concurrent renames as well.

Reviewed-by: Andrey Klychkov <aaklychkov@mail.ru>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1531767486.432607658@f357.i.mail.ru
2018-11-14 17:09:54 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
d20dceaf50 doc: Fix minor whitespace issue
Reported-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
2018-11-13 13:51:38 +01:00
Michael Paquier
319a810180 Fix dependency handling of partitions and inheritance for ON COMMIT
This commit fixes a set of issues with ON COMMIT actions when used on
partitioned tables and tables with inheritance children:
- Applying ON COMMIT DROP on a partitioned table with partitions or on a
table with inheritance children caused a failure at commit time, with
complains about the children being already dropped as all relations are
dropped one at the same time.
- Applying ON COMMIT DELETE on a partition relying on a partitioned
table which uses ON COMMIT DROP would cause the partition truncation to
fail as the parent is removed first.

The solution to the first problem is to handle the removal of all the
dependencies in one go instead of dropping relations one-by-one, based
on a suggestion from Álvaro Herrera.  So instead all the relation OIDs
to remove are gathered and then processed in one round of multiple
deletions.

The solution to the second problem is to reorder the actions, with
truncation happening first and relation drop done after.  Even if it
means that a partition could be first truncated, then immediately
dropped if its partitioned table is dropped, this has the merit to keep
the code simple as there is no need to do existence checks on the
relations to drop.

Contrary to a manual TRUNCATE on a partitioned table, ON COMMIT DELETE
does not cascade to its partitions.  The ON COMMIT action defined on
each partition gets the priority.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/68f17907-ec98-1192-f99f-8011400517f5@lab.ntt.co.jp
Backpatch-through: 10
2018-11-09 10:03:22 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
3a769d8239 pg_upgrade: Allow use of file cloning
Add another transfer mode --clone to pg_upgrade (besides the existing
--link and the default copy), using special file cloning calls.  This
makes the file transfer faster and more space efficient, achieving
speed similar to --link mode without the associated drawbacks.

On Linux, file cloning is supported on Btrfs and XFS (if formatted with
reflink support).  On macOS, file cloning is supported on APFS.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
2018-11-07 18:35:20 +01:00
Tom Lane
5d28c9bd73 Disable recheck_on_update optimization to avoid crashes.
The code added by commit c203d6cf8 causes a crash in at least one case,
where a potentially-optimizable expression index has a storage type
different from the input data type.  A cursory code review turned up
numerous other problems that seem impractical to fix on short notice.

Andres argued for revert of that patch some time ago, and if additional
senior committers had been paying attention, that's likely what would
have happened, but we were not :-(

At this point we can't just revert, at least not in v11, because that would
mean an ABI break for code touching relcache entries.  And we should not
remove the (also buggy) support for the recheck_on_update index reloption,
since it might already be used in some databases in the field.  So this
patch just does the as-little-invasive-as-possible measure of disabling
the feature as though recheck_on_update were forced off for all indexes.
I also removed the related regression tests (which would otherwise fail)
and the user-facing documentation of the reloption.

We should undertake a more thorough code cleanup if the patch can't be
fixed, but not under the extreme time pressure of being already overdue
for 11.1 release.

Per report from Ondřej Bouda and subsequent private discussion among
pgsql-release.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181106185255.776mstcyehnc63ty@alvherre.pgsql
2018-11-06 18:33:28 -05:00
Michael Paquier
add9182e59 Reorganize format options of psql in alphabetical order
This makes the addition of new formats easier, and documentation lookups
easier.

Author: Daniel Vérité
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1803081004241.2916@lancre
2018-11-06 15:04:40 +09:00
Tom Lane
15c7293477 Fix bugs in plpgsql's handling of CALL argument lists.
exec_stmt_call() tried to extract information out of a CALL statement's
argument list without using expand_function_arguments(), apparently in
the hope of saving a few nanoseconds by not processing defaulted
arguments.  It got that quite wrong though, leading to crashes with
named arguments, as well as failure to enforce writability of the
argument for a defaulted INOUT parameter.  Fix and simplify the logic
by using expand_function_arguments() before examining the list.

Also, move the argument-examination to just after producing the CALL
command's plan, before invoking the called procedure.  This ensures
that we'll track possible changes in the procedure's argument list
correctly, and avoids a hazard of the plan cache being flushed while
the procedure executes.

Also fix assorted falsehoods and omissions in associated documentation.

Per bug #15477 from Alexey Stepanov.

Patch by me, with some help from Pavel Stehule.  Back-patch to v11.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15477-86075b1d1d319e0a@postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRA6UsujpTs9Sdwmk-R6yQykPx46wgjj+YZ7zxm4onrDyw@mail.gmail.com
2018-11-04 13:25:39 -05:00
Stephen Frost
ceadcbe8ff Remove extra word from create sub docs
Improve the documentation in the CREATE SUBSCRIPTION command a bit by
removing an extraneous word and spelling out 'information'.
2018-11-03 12:21:54 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
56c0484b2e Fix missing whitespace in pg_dump ref page
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2018-10-29 12:34:49 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
5b75a4f826 pgbench: Report errors during run better
When an error occurs during a benchmark run, exit with a nonzero exit
code and write a message at the end.  Previously, it would just print
the error message when it happened but then proceed to print the run
summary normally and exit with status 0.  To still allow
distinguishing setup from run-time errors, we use exit status 2 for
the new state, whereas existing errors during pgbench initialization
use exit status 1.

Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2018-10-15 10:34:35 +02:00
Tom Lane
0027915143 Doc: copy-editing for CREATE INDEX reference page.
Justin Pryzby, Jonathan S. Katz, and myself.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181006134249.GD871@telsasoft.com
2018-10-13 16:42:58 -04:00
Thomas Munro
212fab9926 Relax transactional restrictions on ALTER TYPE ... ADD VALUE (redux).
Originally committed as 15bc038f (plus some follow-ups), this was
reverted in 28e07270 due to a problem discovered in parallel
workers.  This new version corrects that problem by sending the
list of uncommitted enum values to parallel workers.

Here follows the original commit message describing the change:

To prevent possibly breaking indexes on enum columns, we must keep
uncommitted enum values from getting stored in tables, unless we
can be sure that any such column is new in the current transaction.

Formerly, we enforced this by disallowing ALTER TYPE ... ADD VALUE
from being executed at all in a transaction block, unless the target
enum type had been created in the current transaction.  This patch
removes that restriction, and instead insists that an uncommitted enum
value can't be referenced unless it belongs to an enum type created
in the same transaction as the value.  Per discussion, this should be
a bit less onerous.  It does require each function that could possibly
return a new enum value to SQL operations to check this restriction,
but there aren't so many of those that this seems unmaintainable.

Author: Andrew Dunstan and Tom Lane, with parallel query fix by Thomas Munro
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm%3D0Ei7g6PaNTbcmAh9tCRahQrk%3Dr5ZWLD-jr7hXweYX3yg%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4075.1459088427%40sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-10-09 12:51:01 +13:00
Michael Paquier
803b1301e8 Add option SKIP_LOCKED to VACUUM and ANALYZE
When specified, this option allows VACUUM to skip the work on a relation
if there is a conflicting lock on it when trying to open it at the
beginning of its processing.

Similarly to autovacuum, this comes with a couple of limitations while
the relation is processed which can cause the process to still block:
- when opening the relation indexes.
- when acquiring row samples for table inheritance trees, partition trees
or certain types of foreign tables, and that a lock is taken on some
leaves of such trees.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9EF7EBE4-720D-4CF1-9D0E-4403D7E92990@amazon.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171201160907.27110.74730@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-10-04 09:00:33 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
a6949ca34d doc: Clarify CREATE TABLESPACE documentation
Be more specific about when and how to create the directory and what
permissions it should have.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5ca60e1a-26f9-89fd-e912-021dd2b8afe2%40gmail.com
2018-10-01 14:07:01 +02:00
Andres Freund
92a0342a90 Correct overflow handling in pgbench.
This patch attempts, although it's quite possible there are a few
holes, to properly detect and reported signed integer overflows in
pgbench.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171212052943.k2hlckfkeft3eiio@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-09-27 21:50:57 -07:00
Tom Lane
73a6005137 Doc: warn against using parallel restore with --load-via-partition-root.
This isn't terribly safe, and making it so doesn't seem like a small
project, so for the moment just warn against it.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/13624.1535486019@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-09-23 18:34:18 -04:00
Michael Paquier
ce9cf8e7e6 Document lock taken on referenced table when adding a foreign key
This can happen for CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE, so a mention is added
to both of them in the concerned subsections.

Author: Adrien Nayrat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c4e8af11-1dfc-766a-c953-76979b9fcdaa@anayrat.info
2018-09-21 15:03:37 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
da1db40435 doc: clarify pg_basebackup's -C/--create-slot description
The previous text was overly complex.

Backpatch-through: 11
2018-09-16 11:35:34 -04:00
Tom Lane
17b7c302b5 Fully enforce uniqueness of constraint names.
It's been true for a long time that we expect names of table and domain
constraints to be unique among the constraints of that table or domain.
However, the enforcement of that has been pretty haphazard, and it missed
some corner cases such as creating a CHECK constraint and then an index
constraint of the same name (as per recent report from André Hänsel).
Also, due to the lack of an actual unique index enforcing this, duplicates
could be created through race conditions.

Moreover, the code that searches pg_constraint has been quite inconsistent
about how to handle duplicate names if one did occur: some places checked
and threw errors if there was more than one match, while others just
processed the first match they came to.

To fix, create a unique index on (conrelid, contypid, conname).  Since
either conrelid or contypid is zero, this will separately enforce
uniqueness of constraint names among constraints of any one table and any
one domain.  (If we ever implement SQL assertions, and put them into this
catalog, more thought might be needed.  But it'd be at least as reasonable
to put them into a new catalog; having overloaded this one catalog with
two kinds of constraints was a mistake already IMO.)  This index can replace
the existing non-unique index on conrelid, though we need to keep the one
on contypid for query performance reasons.

Having done that, we can simplify the logic in various places that either
coped with duplicates or neglected to, as well as potentially improve
lookup performance when searching for a constraint by name.

Also, as per our usual practice, install a preliminary check so that you
get something more friendly than a unique-index violation report in the
case complained of by André.  And teach ChooseIndexName to avoid choosing
autogenerated names that would draw such a failure.

While it's not possible to make such a change in the back branches,
it doesn't seem quite too late to put this into v11, so do so.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0c1001d4428f$0942b430$1bc81c90$@webkr.de
2018-09-04 13:45:35 -04:00
Alexander Korotkov
ec74369931 Implement "pg_ctl logrotate" command
Currently there are two ways to trigger log rotation in logging collector
process: call pg_rotate_logfile() SQL-function or send SIGUSR1 signal directly
to logging collector process.  However, it's nice to have more suitable way
for external tools to do that, which wouldn't require SQL connection or
knowledge of logging collector pid.  This commit implements triggering log
rotation by "pg_ctl logrotate" command.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180416.115435.28153375.horiguchi.kyotaro%40lab.ntt.co.jp
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Kuzmenkov, Alexander Korotkov
2018-09-01 19:46:49 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera
a846e6d023 pg_verify_checksums: rename -d to --verbose
Using -d is odd, because we normally reserve that for a database
argument, so rename it to -v and add long version --verbose.

Also, reduce it to emit one line per file checked rather than one line
per block.

Per a complaint from Michael Banck.

Author: Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck <michael.banck@credativ.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180827113411.GA22768@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2018-08-30 06:35:55 -03:00
Bruce Momjian
cc2e457fe8 doc: "Latest checkpoint location" will not match in pg_upgrade
Mention that "Latest checkpoint location" will not match in pg_upgrade
if the standby server is still running during the upgrade, which is
possible.  "Match" text first appeared in PG 9.5.

Reported-by: Paul Bonaud

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c7268794-edb4-1772-3bfd-04c54585c24e@trainline.com

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2018-08-25 13:35:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7abf8ee1e8 docs: Clarify pg_ctl initdb option text to match options proto.
The options string appeared in PG 10.

Reported-by: pgsql-kr@postgresql.kr

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/153500377658.1378.6587007319641704057@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-08-25 12:01:53 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
2d41d914ab Copy-editing of pg_verify_checksums help and ref page
Reformat synopsis, put options into better order, make the desciption
line a bit shorter, and put more details into the description.
2018-08-23 20:32:56 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
0a63f996e0 Change PROCEDURE to FUNCTION in CREATE TRIGGER syntax
Since procedures are now a different thing from functions, change the
CREATE TRIGGER and CREATE EVENT TRIGGER syntax to use FUNCTION in the
clause that specifies the function.  PROCEDURE is still accepted for
compatibility.

pg_dump and ruleutils.c output is not changed yet, because that would
require a change in information_schema.sql and thus a catversion change.

Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
2018-08-22 14:44:49 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
d12782898e Change PROCEDURE to FUNCTION in CREATE OPERATOR syntax
Since procedures are now a different thing from functions, change the
CREATE OPERATOR syntax to use FUNCTION in the clause that specifies the
function.  PROCEDURE is still accepted for compatibility.

Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
2018-08-22 14:44:49 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
b19495772e doc: Update uses of the word "procedure"
Historically, the term procedure was used as a synonym for function in
Postgres/PostgreSQL.  Now we have procedures as separate objects from
functions, so we need to clean up the documentation to not mix those
terms.

In particular, mentions of "trigger procedures" are changed to "trigger
functions", and access method "support procedures" are changed to
"support functions".  (The latter already used FUNCTION in the SQL
syntax anyway.)  Also, the terminology in the SPI chapter has been
cleaned up.

A few tests, examples, and code comments are also adjusted to be
consistent with documentation changes, but not everything.

Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
2018-08-22 14:44:49 +02:00
Michael Paquier
ee80124811 Mention ownership requirements for REFRESH MATERIALIZED VIEW in docs
Author: Dian Fay
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/745abbd2-a1a0-ead8-2cb2-768c16747d97@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.3
2018-08-17 11:29:15 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
a5db27418e Add RECURSIVE to documentation index
Author: Daniel Vérité <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/76d905d7-7eb7-4574-b6ec-a0ca3a1523c0@manitou-mail.org
2018-08-09 16:19:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b284262e40 docs: Only first instance of a PREPARE parameter sets data type
If the first reference to $1 is "($1 = col) or ($1 is null)", the data
type can be determined, but not for "($1 is null) or ($1 = col)".  This
change documents this.

Reported-by: Morgan Owens

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/153233728858.1404.15268121695358514937@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 9.3
2018-08-09 10:13:15 -04:00
Michael Paquier
661dd23950 Restrict access to reindex of shared catalogs for non-privileged users
A database owner running a database-level REINDEX has the possibility to
also do the operation on shared system catalogs without being an owner
of them, which allows him to block resources it should not have access
to.  The same goes for a schema owner.  For example, PostgreSQL would go
unresponsive and even block authentication if a lock is waited for
pg_authid.  This commit makes sure that a user running a REINDEX SYSTEM,
DATABASE or SCHEMA only works on the following relations:
- The user is a superuser
- The user is the table owner
- The user is the database/schema owner, only if the relation worked on
is not shared.

Robert has worded most the documentation changes, and I have coded the
core part.

Reported-by: Lloyd Albin, Jeremy Schneider
Author: Michael Paquier, Robert Haas
Reviewed by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152512087100.19803.12733865831237526317@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180805211059.GA2185@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 11- as the current behavior has been around for a
very long time and could be disruptive for already released branches.
2018-08-09 09:40:15 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
70de0abdb7 doc: Improve CREATE COLLATION locking documentation
Move out of the concurrency control chapter, where mostly only user
table locks are discussed, and move to CREATE COLLATION reference page.

Author: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Author: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
2018-07-30 22:09:48 +02:00
Noah Misch
e09144e6ce Document security implications of qualified names.
Commit 5770172cb0 documented secure schema
usage, and that advice suffices for using unqualified names securely.
Document, in typeconv-func primarily, the additional issues that arise
with qualified names.  Back-patch to 9.3 (all supported versions).

Reviewed by Jonathan S. Katz.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180721012446.GA1840594@rfd.leadboat.com
2018-07-28 20:08:01 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut
fb421231da psql: Add option for procedures to \df 2018-07-24 11:38:53 +02:00
Tom Lane
701fd0bbc9 Drop the rule against included index columns duplicating key columns.
The initial version of the included-index-column feature stated that
included columns couldn't be the same as any key column of the index.
While it'd be pretty silly to do that, since the included column would be
entirely redundant, we've never prohibited redundant index columns before
so it's not very consistent to do so here.  Moreover, the prohibition
was itself badly implemented, so that it failed to reject columns that
were effectively identical but not spelled quite alike, as reported by
Aditya Toshniwal.

(Moreover, it's not hard to imagine that for some non-btree index types,
such cases would be non-silly anyhow: the index might use a lossy
representation for key columns but be able to support retrieval of the
original form of included columns.)

Hence, let's just drop the prohibition.

In passing, do some copy-editing on the documentation for the
included-column feature.

Yugo Nagata; documentation and test corrections by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAM9w-_mhBCys4fQNfaiQKTRrVWtoFrZ-wXmDuE9Nj5y-Y7aDKQ@mail.gmail.com
2018-07-18 14:43:03 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
c6736ff760 doc: move PARTITION OF stanza to just below PARTITION BY
It's more logical this way, since the new ordering matches the way the
tables are created; but in any case, the previous location of PARTITION OF
did not appear carefully chosen anyway (since it didn't match the
location in which it appears in the synopsys either, which is what we
normally do.)

In the PARTITION BY stanza, add a link to the partitioning section in
the DDL chapter, too.

Suggested-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwY4Ld7ecxL_KAmaxwt0FUu5VcPPN2L4dh+3BeYbrdBa5g@mail.gmail.com
2018-07-17 00:54:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
3884072329 Prohibit transaction commands in security definer procedures
Starting and aborting transactions in security definer procedures
doesn't work.  StartTransaction() insists that the security context
stack is empty, so this would currently cause a crash, and
AbortTransaction() resets it.  This could be made to work by
reorganizing the code, but right now we just prohibit it.

Reported-by: amul sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAJ_b96Gupt_LFL7uNyy3c50-wbhA68NUjiK5%3DrF6_w%3Dpq_T%3DQ%40mail.gmail.com
2018-07-13 10:41:32 +02:00
Thomas Munro
387a5cfb94 Add pg_dump --on-conflict-do-nothing option.
When dumping INSERT statements, optionally add ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING.

Author: Surafel Temesgen
Reviewed-by: Takeshi Ideriha, Nico Williams, Dilip Kumar
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q-PQ9cOEzs2%2BQHK5ObfF_4QbmBaYXbZx6BGGN66Q-n8FA%40mail.gmail.com
2018-07-13 13:57:03 +12:00
Tom Lane
632b4ae92d Doc: minor improvement in pl/pgsql FETCH/MOVE documentation.
Explain that you can use any integer expression for the "count" in
pl/pgsql's versions of FETCH/MOVE, unlike the SQL versions which only
allow a constant.

Remove the duplicate version of this para under MOVE.  I don't see
a good reason to maintain two identical paras when we just said that
MOVE works exactly like FETCH.

Per Pavel Stehule, though I didn't use his text.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRAcvSXcNdUGx43bOK1e3NNPbQny7neoTLN42af+8MYWEA@mail.gmail.com
2018-07-12 12:29:03 -04:00
Tom Lane
e0cd0ea4f9 Doc: update documentation for requirement of ORDER BY in GROUPS mode.
Commit ff4f88916 adjusted the code to enforce the SQL spec's requirement
that a window using GROUPS mode must have an ORDER BY clause.  But I missed
that the documentation explicitly said you didn't have to have one.

Also minor wordsmithing in the window-function section of select.sgml.

Per Masahiko Sawada, though I didn't use his patch.
2018-07-12 11:10:24 -04:00
Michael Paquier
8a00b96aa9 Add pg_rewind --no-sync
This is an option consistent with what pg_dump and pg_basebackup provide
which is useful for leveraging the I/O effort when testing things, not
to be used in a production environment.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180325122607.GB3707@paquier.xyz
2018-07-10 08:51:10 +09:00
Michael Paquier
eb270b00b2 Add note in pg_rewind documentation about read-only files
When performing pg_rewind, the presence of a read-only file which is not
accessible for writes will cause a failure while processing.  This can
cause the control file of the target data folder to be truncated,
causing it to not be reusable with a successive run.

Also, when pg_rewind fails mid-flight, there is likely no way to be able
to recover the target data folder anyway, in which case a new base
backup is the best option.  A note is added in the documentation as
well about.

Reported-by: Christian H.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180104200633.17004.16377%40wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-07-07 08:10:10 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
b46727e07a doc: Reorganize CREATE TABLE / LIKE option documentation
This section once started out small but has now grown quite a bit and
needs a bit of structure.

Rewrite as list, add documentation of EXCLUDING, and improve the
documentation of INCLUDING ALL instead of just listing all the options
again.

per report from Yugo Nagata that EXCLUDING was not documented, that part
reviewed by Daniel Gustafsson, most of the rewrite was by me
2018-07-04 10:45:15 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
f7481d2c3c Documentation spell checking and markup improvements 2018-06-29 21:26:41 +02:00
Michael Paquier
c672d709b0 Fix description and documentation related to pg_restore --no-comments
These descriptions have been referring to object dump, but a restore
operation is done.

Reported-by: Andrey Lizenko
Author: Andrey Lizenko
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152992021588.1268.16786093506650391435@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-06-26 14:57:53 +09:00
Magnus Hagander
d9443d9608 Fix a number of typos
Author: Liudmila Mantrova <l.mantrova@postgrespro.ru>
2018-06-20 16:01:18 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
741ee9dc81 Support long option for --pgdata in pg_verify_checksums
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2018-06-20 14:33:48 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
d73300a286 Document the -D and $PGDATA switch/env for pg_verify_checksums
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2018-06-20 14:32:51 +02:00
Michael Paquier
c83e202990 Fix grammar in REVOKE documentation
Reported-by: Erwin Brandstetter
2018-06-10 22:44:17 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
5efbdd36f1 doc: Move some new options into better positions on man pages 2018-06-07 23:36:04 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
3b9b7516f4 ecpg: Document new compatibility option
It's listed in --help, so it should be listed in the man page as well.
2018-06-07 23:33:24 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
4d6a854f17 Put new command-line options into alphabetical order 2018-06-04 15:03:15 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
99164e6952 doc: adjust DECLARE docs to mention FOR UPDATE behavior
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8dc63ba7-dc56-fc7c-fc16-4fae03e3bfe6@2ndquadrant.com

Author: Peter Eisentraut, Tom Lane, me

Backpatch-through: 9.3
2018-05-28 13:16:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f037de6aeb doc: Fix some trailing whitespace 2018-05-21 14:49:53 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
477d243b0f doc: Whitespace fixes in man pages 2018-05-21 14:43:24 -04:00
Andrew Gierth
1da162e1f5 Fix SQL:2008 FETCH FIRST syntax to allow parameters.
OFFSET <x> ROWS FETCH FIRST <y> ROWS ONLY syntax is supposed to accept
<simple value specification>, which includes parameters as well as
literals. When this syntax was added all those years ago, it was done
inconsistently, with <x> and <y> being different subsets of the
standard syntax.

Rectify that by making <x> and <y> accept the same thing, and allowing
either a (signed) numeric literal or a c_expr there, which allows for
parameters, variables, and parenthesized arbitrary expressions.

Per bug #15200 from Lukas Eder.

Backpatch all the way, since this has been broken from the start.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/877enz476l.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/152647780335.27204.16895288237122418685@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-05-21 17:27:08 +01:00
Tom Lane
f755a152d4 Improve spelling of new FINALFUNC_MODIFY aggregate attribute.
I'd used SHARABLE as a value originally, but Peter Eisentraut points out
that dictionaries agree that SHAREABLE is the preferred spelling.
Run around and change that before it's too late.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d2e1afd4-659c-50d6-1b20-7cfd3675e909@2ndquadrant.com
2018-05-21 11:41:42 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
3ce7f72529 pg_basebackup: Remove short option -k
-k meant --no-verify-checksums, which is the opposite of what initdb
uses -k for.  After discussion, a short option does not seem necessary,
so just keep the long option.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d510f8aa-19e1-d06e-7630-ad27f7441d68%402ndquadrant.com
2018-05-21 10:01:49 -04:00
Robert Haas
f955d7ee16 Documentation updates for partitioning.
Takayuki Tsunakawa

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/0A3221C70F24FB45833433255569204D1F965627@G01JPEXMBYT05
2018-05-07 09:48:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
2e83e6bd74 Adjust hints and docs to suggest CREATE EXTENSION not CREATE LANGUAGE.
The core PLs have been extension-ified for seven years now, and we can
reasonably hope that all out-of-core PLs have been too.  So adjust a few
places that were still recommending CREATE LANGUAGE as the user-level
way to install a PL.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaJTUDMSuSCg4k08Dv8vhbrJq9nP3ZfPbmysVz_616qxw@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-27 13:42:03 -04:00
Tom Lane
4df58f7ed7 Fix handling of partition bounds for boolean partitioning columns.
Previously, you could partition by a boolean column as long as you
spelled the bound values as string literals, for instance FOR VALUES
IN ('t').  The trouble with this is that ruleutils.c printed that as
FOR VALUES IN (TRUE), which is reasonable syntax but wasn't accepted by
the grammar.  That results in dump-and-reload failures for such cases.

Apply a minimal fix that just causes TRUE and FALSE to be converted to
strings 'true' and 'false'.  This is pretty grotty, but it's too late for
a more principled fix in v11 (to say nothing of v10).  We should revisit
the whole issue of how partition bound values are parsed for v12.

Amit Langote

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e05c5162-1103-7e37-d1ab-6de3e0afaf70@lab.ntt.co.jp
2018-04-23 15:29:11 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
fe7fc52645 Improve docs for the new INCLUDE directive in CREATE/ALTER TABLE.
Author: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20180411082020.GD19732%40paquier.xyz
2018-04-18 05:45:32 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
03030512d1 Add more infinite recursion detection while locking a view.
Also add regression test cases for detecting infinite recursion in
locking view tests.  Some document enhancements. Patch by Yugo Nagata.
2018-04-17 16:59:17 +09:00
Magnus Hagander
90372729f4 Fix build of pg_verify_checksum docs
They were accidentally excluded when reverting the backend online
checksum functionality, and since they weren't built the incorrect
reference to a removed section also did not trigger a problem.

Author: Christoph Berg
2018-04-15 13:57:02 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
645387927f Clarify pg_verify_checksum documentation
Make it clear that a cluster has to be shut down cleanly before
pg_verify_checksum can be run against it.

Author: Michael Paquier
Review: Daniel Gustafsson
2018-04-15 13:52:57 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
44e2df461f Remove -f option from pg_verify_checksums
This option makes no sense when the cluster checksum state cannot be
changed, and should have been removed in the revert.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Review: Michael Paquier
2018-04-15 13:52:48 +02:00
Simon Riggs
08ea7a2291 Revert MERGE patch
This reverts commits d204ef6377,
83454e3c2b and a few more commits thereafter
(complete list at the end) related to MERGE feature.

While the feature was fully functional, with sufficient test coverage and
necessary documentation, it was felt that some parts of the executor and
parse-analyzer can use a different design and it wasn't possible to do that in
the available time. So it was decided to revert the patch for PG11 and retry
again in the future.

Thanks again to all reviewers and bug reporters.

List of commits reverted, in reverse chronological order:

 f1464c5380 Improve parse representation for MERGE
 ddb4158579 MERGE syntax diagram correction
 530e69e59b Allow cpluspluscheck to pass by renaming variable
 01b88b4df5 MERGE minor errata
 3af7b2b0d4 MERGE fix variable warning in non-assert builds
 a5d86181ec MERGE INSERT allows only one VALUES clause
 4b2d44031f MERGE post-commit review
 4923550c20 Tab completion for MERGE
 aa3faa3c7a WITH support in MERGE
 83454e3c2b New files for MERGE
 d204ef6377 MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016

Author: Pavan Deolasee
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
2018-04-12 11:22:56 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
036ca6f7bb doc: Fix typos in pgbench documentation
Author: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Reviewed-by: Edmund Horner <ejrh00@gmail.com>
2018-04-11 08:34:30 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
a228cc13ae Revert "Allow on-line enabling and disabling of data checksums"
This reverts the backend sides of commit 1fde38beaa.
I have, at least for now, left the pg_verify_checksums tool in place, as
this tool can be very valuable without the rest of the patch as well,
and since it's a read-only tool that only runs when the cluster is down
it should be a lot safer.
2018-04-09 19:03:42 +02:00
Stephen Frost
c37b3d08ca Allow group access on PGDATA
Allow the cluster to be optionally init'd with read access for the
group.

This means a relatively non-privileged user can perform a backup of the
cluster without requiring write privileges, which enhances security.

The mode of PGDATA is used to determine whether group permissions are
enabled for directory and file creates.  This method was chosen as it's
simple and works well for the various utilities that write into PGDATA.

Changing the mode of PGDATA manually will not automatically change the
mode of all the files contained therein.  If the user would like to
enable group access on an existing cluster then changing the mode of all
the existing files will be required.  Note that pg_upgrade will
automatically change the mode of all migrated files if the new cluster
is init'd with the -g option.

Tests are included for the backend and all the utilities which operate
on the PG data directory to ensure that the correct mode is set based on
the data directory permissions.

Author: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, with discussion amongst many others.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad346fe6-b23e-59f1-ecb7-0e08390ad629%40pgmasters.net
2018-04-07 17:45:39 -04:00
Teodor Sigaev
8224de4f42 Indexes with INCLUDE columns and their support in B-tree
This patch introduces INCLUDE clause to index definition.  This clause
specifies a list of columns which will be included as a non-key part in
the index.  The INCLUDE columns exist solely to allow more queries to
benefit from index-only scans.  Also, such columns don't need to have
appropriate operator classes.  Expressions are not supported as INCLUDE
columns since they cannot be used in index-only scans.

Index access methods supporting INCLUDE are indicated by amcaninclude flag
in IndexAmRoutine.  For now, only B-tree indexes support INCLUDE clause.

In B-tree indexes INCLUDE columns are truncated from pivot index tuples
(tuples located in non-leaf pages and high keys).  Therefore, B-tree indexes
now might have variable number of attributes.  This patch also provides
generic facility to support that: pivot tuples contain number of their
attributes in t_tid.ip_posid.  Free 13th bit of t_info is used for indicating
that.  This facility will simplify further support of index suffix truncation.
The changes of above are backward-compatible, pg_upgrade doesn't need special
handling of B-tree indexes for that.

Bump catalog version

Author: Anastasia Lubennikova with contribition by Alexander Korotkov and me
Reviewed by: Peter Geoghegan, Tomas Vondra, Antonin Houska, Jeff Janes,
			 David Rowley, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/56168952.4010101@postgrespro.ru
2018-04-07 23:00:39 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
039eb6e92f Logical replication support for TRUNCATE
Update the built-in logical replication system to make use of the
previously added logical decoding for TRUNCATE support.  Add the
required truncate callback to pgoutput and a new logical replication
protocol message.

Publications get a new attribute to determine whether to replicate
truncate actions.  When updating a publication via pg_dump from an older
version, this is not set, thus preserving the previous behavior.

Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Marco Nenciarini <marco.nenciarini@2ndquadrant.it>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
2018-04-07 11:34:11 -04:00
Robert Haas
3d956d9562 Allow insert and update tuple routing and COPY for foreign tables.
Also enable this for postgres_fdw.

Etsuro Fujita, based on an earlier patch by Amit Langote. The larger
patch series of which this is a part has been reviewed by Amit
Langote, David Fetter, Maksim Milyutin, Álvaro Herrera, Stephen Frost,
and me.  Minor documentation changes to the final version by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/29906a26-da12-8c86-4fb9-d8f88442f2b9@lab.ntt.co.jp
2018-04-06 19:22:03 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
3cabe38630 Fix badly edited doc sentence
Noted by Vik Fearing and Robert Haas
2018-04-06 17:41:44 -03:00
Stephen Frost
0fdc8495bf Add default roles for file/program access
This patch adds new default roles named 'pg_read_server_files',
'pg_write_server_files', 'pg_execute_server_program' which
allow an administrator to GRANT to a non-superuser role the ability to
access server-side files or run programs through PostgreSQL (as the user
the database is running as).  Having one of these roles allows a
non-superuser to use server-side COPY to read, write, or with a program,
and to use file_fdw (if installed by a superuser and GRANT'd USAGE on
it) to read from files or run a program.

The existing misc file functions are also changed to allow a user with
the 'pg_read_server_files' default role to read any files on the
filesystem, matching the privileges given to that role through COPY and
file_fdw from above.

Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171231191939.GR2416%40tamriel.snowman.net
2018-04-06 14:47:10 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
1fde38beaa Allow on-line enabling and disabling of data checksums
This makes it possible to turn checksums on in a live cluster, without
the previous need for dump/reload or logical replication (and to turn it
off).

Enabling checkusm starts a background process in the form of a
launcher/worker combination that goes through the entire database and
recalculates checksums on each and every page. Only when all pages have
been checksummed are they fully enabled in the cluster. Any failure of
the process will revert to checksums off and the process has to be
started.

This adds a new WAL record that indicates the state of checksums, so
the process works across replicated clusters.

Authors: Magnus Hagander and Daniel Gustafsson
Review: Tomas Vondra, Michael Banck, Heikki Linnakangas, Andrey Borodin
2018-04-05 22:04:48 +02:00
Simon Riggs
ddb4158579 MERGE syntax diagram correction
Reported-by: Andrew Gierth
2018-04-05 20:36:23 +01:00
Simon Riggs
a5d86181ec MERGE INSERT allows only one VALUES clause
Doc syntax and brief mention of restriction
2018-04-05 12:03:42 +01:00
Teodor Sigaev
a02d51c0d3 Fix misprint in documentation
Masahiko Sawada
2018-04-05 13:06:05 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera
3de241dba8 Foreign keys on partitioned tables
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171231194359.cvojcour423ulha4@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
2018-04-04 14:02:49 -03:00
Teodor Sigaev
857f9c36cd Skip full index scan during cleanup of B-tree indexes when possible
Vacuum of index consists from two stages: multiple (zero of more) ambulkdelete
calls and one amvacuumcleanup call. When workload on particular table
is append-only, then autovacuum isn't intended to touch this table. However,
user may run vacuum manually in order to fill visibility map and get benefits
of index-only scans. Then ambulkdelete wouldn't be called for indexes
of such table (because no heap tuples were deleted), only amvacuumcleanup would
be called In this case, amvacuumcleanup would perform full index scan for
two objectives: put recyclable pages into free space map and update index
statistics.

This patch allows btvacuumclanup to skip full index scan when two conditions
are satisfied: no pages are going to be put into free space map and index
statistics isn't stalled. In order to check first condition, we store
oldest btpo_xact in the meta-page. When it's precedes RecentGlobalXmin, then
there are some recyclable pages. In order to check second condition we store
number of heap tuples observed during previous full index scan by cleanup.
If fraction of newly inserted tuples is less than
vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor, then statistics isn't considered to be
stalled. vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor can be defined as both reloption and GUC (default).

This patch bumps B-tree meta-page version. Upgrade of meta-page is performed
"on the fly": during VACUUM meta-page is rewritten with new version. No special
handling in pg_upgrade is required.

Author: Masahiko Sawada, Alexander Korotkov
Review by: Peter Geoghegan, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Korotkov, Yura Sokolov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAD21AoAX+d2oD_nrd9O2YkpzHaFr=uQeGr9s1rKC3O4ENc568g@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-04 19:29:00 +03:00
Magnus Hagander
4eb77d50c2 Validate page level checksums in base backups
When base backups are run over the replication protocol (for example
using pg_basebackup), verify the checksums of all data blocks if
checksums are enabled. If checksum failures are encountered, log them
as warnings but don't abort the backup.

This becomes the default behaviour in pg_basebackup (provided checksums
are enabled on the server), so add a switch (-k) to disable the checks
if necessary.

Author: Michael Banck
Reviewed-By: Magnus Hagander, David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180228180856.GE13784@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2018-04-03 13:47:16 +02:00
Simon Riggs
aa3faa3c7a WITH support in MERGE
Author: Peter Geoghegan
Recursive support removed, no tests
Docs added by me
2018-04-03 12:13:59 +01:00
Simon Riggs
83454e3c2b New files for MERGE 2018-04-03 10:22:21 +01:00
Simon Riggs
d204ef6377 MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016
MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table
using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL
statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows
a task that would other require multiple PL statements.
e.g.

MERGE INTO target AS t
USING source AS s
ON t.tid = s.sid
WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN
  UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta
WHEN MATCHED THEN
  DELETE
WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN
  INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
  DO NOTHING;

MERGE works with regular and partitioned tables, including
column and row security enforcement, as well as support for
row, statement and transition triggers.

MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though
also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended
to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands
for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead.
MERGE can be used statically from PL/pgSQL.

MERGE does not yet support inheritance, write rules,
RETURNING clauses, updatable views or foreign tables.
MERGE follows SQL Standard per the most recent SQL:2016.

Includes full tests and documentation, including full
isolation tests to demonstrate the concurrent behavior.

This version written from scratch in 2017 by Simon Riggs,
using docs and tests originally written in 2009. Later work
from Pavan Deolasee has been both complex and deep, leaving
the lead author credit now in his hands.
Extensive discussion of concurrency from Peter Geoghegan,
with thanks for the time and effort contributed.

Various issues reported via sqlsmith by Andreas Seltenreich

Authors: Pavan Deolasee, Simon Riggs
Reviewer: Peter Geoghegan, Amit Langote, Tomas Vondra, Simon Riggs

Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.com
https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-03 09:28:16 +01:00
Simon Riggs
aa5877bb26 Revert "MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016"
This reverts commit e6597dc353.
2018-04-02 21:36:38 +01:00
Simon Riggs
7cf8a5c302 Revert "Modified files for MERGE"
This reverts commit 354f13855e.
2018-04-02 21:34:15 +01:00
Simon Riggs
354f13855e Modified files for MERGE 2018-04-02 21:12:47 +01:00
Simon Riggs
e6597dc353 MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016
MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table
using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL
statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows
a task that would other require multiple PL statements.
e.g.

MERGE INTO target AS t
USING source AS s
ON t.tid = s.sid
WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN
  UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta
WHEN MATCHED THEN
  DELETE
WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN
  INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
  DO NOTHING;

MERGE works with regular and partitioned tables, including
column and row security enforcement, as well as support for
row, statement and transition triggers.

MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though
also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended
to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands
for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead.
MERGE can be used statically from PL/pgSQL.

MERGE does not yet support inheritance, write rules,
RETURNING clauses, updatable views or foreign tables.
MERGE follows SQL Standard per the most recent SQL:2016.

Includes full tests and documentation, including full
isolation tests to demonstrate the concurrent behavior.

This version written from scratch in 2017 by Simon Riggs,
using docs and tests originally written in 2009. Later work
from Pavan Deolasee has been both complex and deep, leaving
the lead author credit now in his hands.
Extensive discussion of concurrency from Peter Geoghegan,
with thanks for the time and effort contributed.

Various issues reported via sqlsmith by Andreas Seltenreich

Authors: Pavan Deolasee, Simon Riggs
Reviewers: Peter Geoghegan, Amit Langote, Tomas Vondra, Simon Riggs

Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.com
https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-02 21:04:35 +01:00
Bruce Momjian
3da7502cd0 docs: fix spacing around "if not exists" brackets
Reported-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFcNs+qDD+QKcF8YCPQnjAxoWN61qY_YdFLB3iQqbWCLSCyY0g@mail.gmail.com

Author: Fabrízio de Royes Mello
2018-03-29 21:25:39 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
34c20de4d0 Allow to lock views.
Now all tables used in view definitions can be recursively locked by a
LOCK command.

Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed by Robert Haas, Thomas Munro and me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171011183629.eb2817b3.nagata%40sraoss.co.jp
2018-03-30 09:18:02 +09:00
Fujii Masao
266b6acb31 Make pg_rewind skip files and directories that are removed during server start.
The target cluster that was rewound needs to perform recovery from
the checkpoint created at failover, which leads it to remove or recreate
some files and directories that may have been copied from the source
cluster. So pg_rewind can skip synchronizing such files and directories,
and which reduces the amount of data transferred during a rewind
without changing the usefulness of the operation.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova, Stephen Frost and me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180205071022.GA17337@paquier.xyz
2018-03-29 04:56:52 +09:00
Andrew Dunstan
16828d5c02 Fast ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN with a non-NULL default
Currently adding a column to a table with a non-NULL default results in
a rewrite of the table. For large tables this can be both expensive and
disruptive. This patch removes the need for the rewrite as long as the
default value is not volatile. The default expression is evaluated at
the time of the ALTER TABLE and the result stored in a new column
(attmissingval) in pg_attribute, and a new column (atthasmissing) is set
to true. Any existing row when fetched will be supplied with the
attmissingval. New rows will have the supplied value or the default and
so will never need the attmissingval.

Any time the table is rewritten all the atthasmissing and attmissingval
settings for the attributes are cleared, as they are no longer needed.

The most visible code change from this is in heap_attisnull, which
acquires a third TupleDesc argument, allowing it to detect a missing
value if there is one. In many cases where it is known that there will
not be any (e.g.  catalog relations) NULL can be passed for this
argument.

Andrew Dunstan, heavily modified from an original patch from Serge
Rielau.
Reviewed by Tom Lane, Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra and David Rowley.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/31e2e921-7002-4c27-59f5-51f08404c858@2ndQuadrant.com
2018-03-28 10:43:52 +10:30
Simon Riggs
c203d6cf81 Allow HOT updates for some expression indexes
If the value of an index expression is unchanged after UPDATE,
allow HOT updates where previously we disallowed them, giving
a significant performance boost in those cases.

Particularly useful for indexes such as JSON->>field where the
JSON value changes but the indexed value does not.

Submitted as "surjective indexes" patch, now enabled by use
of new "recheck_on_update" parameter.

Author: Konstantin Knizhnik
Reviewer: Simon Riggs, with much wordsmithing and some cleanup
2018-03-27 19:57:02 +01:00
Teodor Sigaev
64f85894ad Set random seed for pgbench.
Setting random could increase reproducibility of test in some cases. Patch
suggests three providers for seed: time (default), strong random
generator (if available) and unsigned constant. Seed could be set from
command line or enviroment variable.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed by: Chapman Flack
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20160407082711.q7iq3ykffqxcszkv@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-03-26 18:26:27 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera
555ee77a96 Handle INSERT .. ON CONFLICT with partitioned tables
Commit eb7ed3f306 enabled unique constraints on partitioned tables,
but one thing that was not working properly is INSERT/ON CONFLICT.
This commit introduces a new node keeps state related to the ON CONFLICT
clause per partition, and fills it when that partition is about to be
used for tuple routing.

Author: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Etsuro Fujita, Pavan Deolasee
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180228004602.cwdyralmg5ejdqkq@alvherre.pgsql
2018-03-26 10:43:54 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
bf4a8676c3 pg_resetwal: Allow users to change the WAL segment size
This adds a new option --wal-segsize (analogous to initdb) that changes
the WAL segment size in pg_control.

Author: Nathan Bossart <bossartn@amazon.com>
2018-03-25 14:58:49 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
8ad8d916f9 initdb: Further polishing of --wal-segsize option
Extend documentation.  Improve option parsing in case no argument was
specified.
2018-03-25 14:58:21 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e22b27f0cb Add long options to pg_resetwal and pg_controldata
We were running out of good single-letter options for some upcoming
pg_resetwal functionality, so add long options to create more
possibilities.  Add to pg_controldata as well for symmetry.

based on patch by Bossart, Nathan <bossartn@amazon.com>
2018-03-24 21:49:53 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
4644a1170f Improve pg_resetwal documentation
Clarify that the -l option takes a file name, not an "address", and that
that might be different from the LSN if nondefault WAL segment sizes are
used.
2018-03-24 15:38:57 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
86f575948c Allow FOR EACH ROW triggers on partitioned tables
Previously, FOR EACH ROW triggers were not allowed in partitioned
tables.  Now we allow AFTER triggers on them, and on trigger creation we
cascade to create an identical trigger in each partition.  We also clone
the triggers to each partition that is created or attached later.

This means that deferred unique keys are allowed on partitioned tables,
too.

Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Simon Riggs, Amit Langote, Robert Haas,
	Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171229225319.ajltgss2ojkfd3kp@alvherre.pgsql
2018-03-23 10:48:22 -03:00
Teodor Sigaev
f67b113ac6 Add \if support to pgbench
Patch adds \if to pgbench as it done for psql. Implementation shares condition
stack code with psql, so, this code is moved to fe_utils directory.

Author: Fabien COELHO with minor editorization by me
Review by: Vik Fearing, Fedor Sigaev
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/alpine.DEB.2.20.1711252200190.28523@lancre
2018-03-22 17:42:03 +03:00
Teodor Sigaev
e51a04840a Add general purpose hasing functions to pgbench.
Hashing function is useful for simulating real-world workload in test like
WEB workload, as an example - YCSB benchmarks.

Author: Ildar Musin with minor editorization by me
Reviewed by: Fabien Coelho, me
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/0e8bd39e-dfcd-2879-f88f-272799ad7ef2@postgrespro.ru
2018-03-21 18:01:23 +03:00
Tom Lane
a467832047 Doc: note that statement-level view triggers require an INSTEAD OF trigger.
If a view lacks an INSTEAD OF trigger, DML on it can only work by rewriting
the command into a command on the underlying base table(s).  Then we will
fire triggers attached to those table(s), not those for the view.  This
seems appropriate from a consistency standpoint, but nowhere was the
behavior explicitly documented, so let's do that.

There was some discussion of throwing an error or warning if a statement
trigger is created on a view without creating a row INSTEAD OF trigger.
But a simple implementation of that would result in dump/restore ordering
hazards.  Given that it's been like this all along, and we hadn't heard
a complaint till now, a documentation improvement seems sufficient.

Per bug #15106 from Pu Qun.  Back-patch to all supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152083391168.1215.16892140713507052796@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-03-18 15:10:28 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
33803f67f1 Support INOUT arguments in procedures
In a top-level CALL, the values of INOUT arguments will be returned as a
result row.  In PL/pgSQL, the values are assigned back to the input
arguments.  In other languages, the same convention as for return a
record from a function is used.  That does not require any code changes
in the PL implementations.

Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
2018-03-14 12:07:28 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
63cbee6a78 doc: Reword restriction on partition keys in unique indexes
New wording from David G. Johnston, who noticed the unreadable original
also.  Include his suggested test case as well.

Fix a typo I noticed elsewhere while doing this.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwY4Ld7ecxL_KAmaxwt0FUu5VcPPN2L4dh+3BeYbrdBa5g@mail.gmail.com
2018-03-12 13:32:28 -03:00
Andres Freund
854dd8cff5 Add parenthesized options syntax for ANALYZE.
This is analogous to the syntax allowed for VACUUM. This allows us to
avoid making new options reserved keywords and makes it easier to
allow arbitrary argument order. Oh, and it's consistent with the other
commands, too.

Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/D3FC73E2-9B1A-4DB4-8180-55F57D116B4E@amazon.com
2018-03-05 16:21:05 -08:00
Alvaro Herrera
5564c11815 Clone extended stats in CREATE TABLE (LIKE INCLUDING ALL)
The LIKE INCLUDING ALL clause to CREATE TABLE intuitively indicates
cloning of extended statistics on the source table, but it failed to do
so.  Patch it up so that it does.  Also include an INCLUDING STATISTICS
option to the LIKE clause, so that the behavior can be requested
individually, or excluded individually.

While at it, reorder the INCLUDING options, both in code and in docs, in
alphabetical order which makes more sense than feature-implementation
order that was previously used.

Backpatch this to Postgres 10, where extended statistics were
introduced, because this is seen as an oversight in a fresh feature
which is better to get consistent from the get-go instead of changing
only in pg11.

In pg11, comments on statistics objects are cloned too.  In pg10 they
are not, because I (Álvaro) was too coward to change the parse node as
required to support it.  Also, in pg10 I chose not to renumber the
parser symbols for the various INCLUDING options in LIKE, for the same
reason.  Any corresponding user-visible changes (docs) are backpatched,
though.

Reported-by: Stephen Froehlich
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CY1PR0601MB1927315B45667A1B679D0FD5E5EF0@CY1PR0601MB1927.namprd06.prod.outlook.com
2018-03-05 19:37:19 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
dd9ed0bf70 doc: Tiny whitespace fix 2018-03-05 11:27:08 -05:00
Andres Freund
8c438fcc9f doc: Add random_zipfian to list of random functions with argument.
Author: Ildar Musin
Reviewed-By: Fabian Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6376ed81-3ce8-14f4-4758-099872f4ce7d@postgrespro.ru
2018-03-01 01:40:00 -08:00
Peter Eisentraut
d21ddc220f Fix warnings in man page build
The changes in the CREATE POLICY man page from commit
87c2a17fee triggered a stylesheet bug that
created some warning messages and incorrect output.  This installs a
workaround.

Also improve the whitespace a bit so it looks better.
2018-02-28 08:22:51 -05:00
Noah Misch
5770172cb0 Document security implications of search_path and the public schema.
The ability to create like-named objects in different schemas opens up
the potential for users to change the behavior of other users' queries,
maliciously or accidentally.  When you connect to a PostgreSQL server,
you should remove from your search_path any schema for which a user
other than yourself or superusers holds the CREATE privilege.  If you do
not, other users holding CREATE privilege can redefine the behavior of
your commands, causing them to perform arbitrary SQL statements under
your identity.  "SET search_path = ..." and "SELECT
pg_catalog.set_config(...)" are not vulnerable to such hijacking, so one
can use either as the first command of a session.  As special
exceptions, the following client applications behave as documented
regardless of search_path settings and schema privileges: clusterdb
createdb createlang createuser dropdb droplang dropuser ecpg (not
programs it generates) initdb oid2name pg_archivecleanup pg_basebackup
pg_config pg_controldata pg_ctl pg_dump pg_dumpall pg_isready
pg_receivewal pg_recvlogical pg_resetwal pg_restore pg_rewind pg_standby
pg_test_fsync pg_test_timing pg_upgrade pg_waldump reindexdb vacuumdb
vacuumlo.  Not included are core client programs that run user-specified
SQL commands, namely psql and pgbench.  PostgreSQL encourages non-core
client applications to do likewise.

Document this in the context of libpq connections, psql connections,
dblink connections, ECPG connections, extension packaging, and schema
usage patterns.  The principal defense for applications is "SELECT
pg_catalog.set_config('search_path', '', false)", and the principal
defense for databases is "REVOKE CREATE ON SCHEMA public FROM PUBLIC".
Either one is sufficient to prevent attack.  After a REVOKE, consider
auditing the public schema for objects named like pg_catalog objects.

Authors of SECURITY DEFINER functions use some of the same defenses, and
the CREATE FUNCTION reference page already covered them thoroughly.
This is a good opportunity to audit SECURITY DEFINER functions for
robust security practice.

Back-patch to 9.3 (all supported versions).

Reviewed by Michael Paquier and Jonathan S. Katz.  Reported by Arseniy
Sharoglazov.

Security: CVE-2018-1058
2018-02-26 07:39:44 -08:00
Alvaro Herrera
9a89f6d854 Adjust ALTER TABLE docs on partitioned constraints
Move the "additional restrictions" comment to ALTER TABLE ADD
CONSTRAINT instead of ADD CONSTRAINT USING INDEX; and in the latter
instead indicate that partitioned tables are unsupported

Noted by David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwY4Ld7ecxL_KAmaxwt0FUu5VcPPN2L4dh+3BeYbrdBa5g@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-20 12:08:55 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
eb7ed3f306 Allow UNIQUE indexes on partitioned tables
If we restrict unique constraints on partitioned tables so that they
must always include the partition key, then our standard approach to
unique indexes already works --- each unique key is forced to exist
within a single partition, so enforcing the unique restriction in each
index individually is enough to have it enforced globally.  Therefore we
can implement unique indexes on partitions by simply removing a few
restrictions (and adding others.)

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171222212921.hi6hg6pem2w2t36z@alvherre.pgsql
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171229230607.3iib6b62fn3uaf47@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Simon Riggs, Jesper Pedersen, Peter Eisentraut, Jaime
	Casanova, Amit Langote
2018-02-19 17:40:00 -03:00
Tom Lane
439c7bc1a0 Doc: fix minor bug in CREATE TABLE example.
One example in create_table.sgml claimed to be showing table constraint
syntax, but it was really column constraint syntax due to the omission
of a comma.  This is both wrong and confusing, so fix it in all
supported branches.

Per report from neil@postgrescompare.com.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/151871659877.1393.2431103178451978795@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-02-15 13:56:38 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
7a32ac8a66 Add procedure support to pg_get_functiondef
This also makes procedures work in psql's \ef and \sf commands.

Reported-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
2018-02-13 15:13:44 -05:00
Tom Lane
0a459cec96 Support all SQL:2011 options for window frame clauses.
This patch adds the ability to use "RANGE offset PRECEDING/FOLLOWING"
frame boundaries in window functions.  We'd punted on that back in the
original patch to add window functions, because it was not clear how to
do it in a reasonably data-type-extensible fashion.  That problem is
resolved here by adding the ability for btree operator classes to provide
an "in_range" support function that defines how to add or subtract the
RANGE offset value.  Factoring it this way also allows the operator class
to avoid overflow problems near the ends of the datatype's range, if it
wishes to expend effort on that.  (In the committed patch, the integer
opclasses handle that issue, but it did not seem worth the trouble to
avoid overflow failures for datetime types.)

The patch includes in_range support for the integer_ops opfamily
(int2/int4/int8) as well as the standard datetime types.  Support for
other numeric types has been requested, but that seems like suitable
material for a follow-on patch.

In addition, the patch adds GROUPS mode which counts the offset in
ORDER-BY peer groups rather than rows, and it adds the frame_exclusion
options specified by SQL:2011.  As far as I can see, we are now fully
up to spec on window framing options.

Existing behaviors remain unchanged, except that I changed the errcode
for a couple of existing error reports to meet the SQL spec's expectation
that negative "offset" values should be reported as SQLSTATE 22013.

Internally and in relevant parts of the documentation, we now consistently
use the terminology "offset PRECEDING/FOLLOWING" rather than "value
PRECEDING/FOLLOWING", since the term "value" is confusingly vague.

Oliver Ford, reviewed and whacked around some by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGMVOdu9sivPAxbNN0X+q19Sfv9edEPv=HibOJhB14TJv_RCQg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-07 00:06:56 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
1d81c093db doc: Clarify psql --list documentation a bit more 2018-02-03 10:19:57 -05:00
Robert Haas
9da0cc3528 Support parallel btree index builds.
To make this work, tuplesort.c and logtape.c must also support
parallelism, so this patch adds that infrastructure and then applies
it to the particular case of parallel btree index builds.  Testing
to date shows that this can often be 2-3x faster than a serial
index build.

The model for deciding how many workers to use is fairly primitive
at present, but it's better than not having the feature.  We can
refine it as we get more experience.

Peter Geoghegan with some help from Rushabh Lathia.  While Heikki
Linnakangas is not an author of this patch, he wrote other patches
without which this feature would not have been possible, and
therefore the release notes should possibly credit him as an author
of this feature.  Reviewed by Claudio Freire, Heikki Linnakangas,
Thomas Munro, Tels, Amit Kapila, me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM3SWZQKM=Pzc=CAHzRixKjp2eO5Q0Jg1SoFQqeXFQ647JiwqQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=AxWqDoVvGU7dq856S4r6sJAj6DBn7VMtigkB33N5eyg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-02 13:32:44 -05:00
Stephen Frost
a2a2205761 Improve ALTER TABLE synopsis
Add into the ALTER TABLE synopsis the definition of
partition_bound_spec, column_constraint, index_parameters and
exclude_element.

Initial patch by Lætitia Avrot, with further improvements by Amit
Langote and Thomas Munro.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/27ec4df3-d1ab-3411-f87f-647f944897e1%40lab.ntt.co.jp
2018-02-02 05:30:04 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
eab30cc6b5 doc: fix trigger inheritance wording
Fix wording from commit 1cf1112990

Reported-by: Robert Haas

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 17:52:47 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
59ad246350 doc: clarify major/minor pg_upgrade versions with examples
The previous docs added in PG 10 were not clear enough for someone who
didn't understand the PG 10 version change, so give more specific
examples.

Reported-by: jim@room118solutions.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171218213041.25744.8414@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 17:09:59 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
1cf1112990 doc: clearify trigger behavior for inheritance
The previous wording added in PG 10 wasn't specific enough about the
behavior of statement and row triggers when using inheritance.

Reported-by: ian@thepathcentral.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171129193934.27108.30796@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 17:00:17 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
de71541460 doc: Improve pg_upgrade rsync examples to use clusterdir
Commit 9521ce4a7a from Sep 13, 2017 and
backpatched through 9.5 used rsync examples with datadir.  The reporter
has pointed out, and testing has verified, that clusterdir must be used,
so update the docs accordingly.

Reported-by: Don Seiler

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHJZqBD0u9dCERpYzK6BkRv=663AmH==DFJpVC=M4Xg_rq2=CQ@mail.gmail.com

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2018-01-31 16:43:40 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
e5dede9097 doc: mention datadir locations are actually config locations
Technically, pg_upgrade's --old-datadir and --new-datadir are
configuration directories, not necessarily data directories.  This is
reflected in the 'postgres' manual page, so do the same for pg_upgrade.

Reported-by: Yves Goergen

Bug: 14898

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171110220912.31513.13322@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-31 16:25:21 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
1e1e599d66 doc: Clarify pg_upgrade documentation
Clarify that the restriction against reg* types only applies to table
columns using these types, not to the type appearing in any other way,
for example as a function argument.
2018-01-29 14:26:17 -05:00
Tom Lane
4971d2a322 Remove the obsolete WITH clause of CREATE FUNCTION.
This clause was superseded by SQL-standard syntax back in 7.3.
We've kept it around for backwards-compatibility purposes ever since;
but 15 years seems like long enough for that, especially seeing that
there are undocumented weirdnesses in how it interacts with the
SQL-standard syntax for specifying the same options.

Michael Paquier, per an observation by Daniel Gustafsson;
some small cosmetic adjustments to nearby code by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180115022748.GB1724@paquier.xyz
2018-01-26 12:25:44 -05:00
Tom Lane
1368e92e16 Support --no-comments in pg_dump, pg_dumpall, pg_restore.
We have switches already to suppress other subsidiary object properties,
such as ACLs, security labels, ownership, and tablespaces, so just on
the grounds of symmetry we should allow suppressing comments as well.
Also, commit 0d4e6ed30 added a positive reason to have this feature,
i.e. to allow obtaining the old behavior of selective pg_restore should
anyone desire that.

Recent commits have removed the cases where pg_dump emitted comments on
built-in objects that the restoring user might not have privileges to
comment on, so the original primary motivation for this feature is gone,
but it still seems at least somewhat useful in its own right.

Robins Tharakan, reviewed by Fabrízio Mello

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEP4nAx22Z4ch74oJGzr5RyyjcyUSbpiFLyeYXX8pehfou92ug@mail.gmail.com
2018-01-25 15:27:24 -05:00
Tom Lane
0d4e6ed308 Clean up some aspects of pg_dump/pg_restore item-selection logic.
Ensure that CREATE DATABASE and related commands are issued when, and
only when, --create is specified.  Previously there were scenarios
where using selective-dump switches would prevent --create from having
any effect.  For example, it would fail to do anything in pg_restore
if the archive file had been made by a selective dump, because there
would be no TOC entry for the database.

Since we don't issue \connect either if we don't issue CREATE DATABASE,
this could result in unexpectedly restoring objects into the wrong
database.

Also fix pg_restore's selective restore logic so that when an object is
selected to be restored, we also restore its ACL, comment, and security
label if any.  Previously there was no way to get the latter properties
except through tedious mucking about with a -L file.  If, for some
reason, you don't want these properties, you can match the old behavior
by adding --no-acl etc.

While at it, try to make _tocEntryRequired() a little better organized
and better documented.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/32668.1516848577@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-01-25 14:26:15 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
d6ab720360 doc: properly indent CREATE TRIGGER paragraph
This was done to match the surrounding indentation.  Text added in PG
10.

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-24 15:13:04 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
e0a0deca38 doc: mention psql -l uses the 'postgres' database by default
Reported-by: Mark Wood

Bug: 14912

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171116171735.1474.30450@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Author: David G. Johnston

Backpatch-through: 10
2018-01-23 18:22:56 -05:00
Tom Lane
c9707d9413 Documentation fix: pg_ctl no longer makes connection attempts.
Overlooked in commit f13ea95f9.  Noted by Nick Barnes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180123093723.7407.3386@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2018-01-23 12:42:03 -05:00
Tom Lane
b3f8401205 Move handling of database properties from pg_dumpall into pg_dump.
This patch rearranges the division of labor between pg_dump and pg_dumpall
so that pg_dump itself handles all properties attached to a single
database.  Notably, a database's ACL (GRANT/REVOKE status) and local GUC
settings established by ALTER DATABASE SET and ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE SET
can be dumped and restored by pg_dump.  This is a long-requested
improvement.

"pg_dumpall -g" will now produce only role- and tablespace-related output,
nothing about individual databases.  The total output of a regular
pg_dumpall run remains the same.

pg_dump (or pg_restore) will restore database-level properties only when
creating the target database with --create.  This applies not only to
ACLs and GUCs but to the other database properties it already handled,
that is database comments and security labels.  This is more consistent
and useful, but does represent an incompatibility in the behavior seen
without --create.

(This change makes the proposed patch to have pg_dump use "COMMENT ON
DATABASE CURRENT_DATABASE" unnecessary, since there is no case where
the command is issued that we won't know the true name of the database.
We might still want that patch as a feature in its own right, but pg_dump
no longer needs it.)

pg_dumpall with --clean will now drop and recreate the "postgres" and
"template1" databases in the target cluster, allowing their locale and
encoding settings to be changed if necessary, and providing a cleaner
way to set nondefault tablespaces for them than we had before.  This
means that such a script must now always be started in the "postgres"
database; the order of drops and reconnects will not work otherwise.
Without --clean, the script will not adjust any database-level properties
of those two databases (including their comments, ACLs, and security
labels, which it formerly would try to set).

Another minor incompatibility is that the CREATE DATABASE commands in a
pg_dumpall script will now always specify locale and encoding settings.
Formerly those would be omitted if they matched the cluster's default.
While that behavior had some usefulness in some migration scenarios,
it also posed a significant hazard of unwanted locale/encoding changes.
To migrate to another locale/encoding, it's now necessary to use pg_dump
without --create to restore into a database with the desired settings.

Commit 4bd371f6f's hack to emit "SET default_transaction_read_only = off"
is gone: we now dodge that problem by the expedient of not issuing ALTER
DATABASE SET commands until after reconnecting to the target database.
Therefore, such settings won't apply during the restore session.

In passing, improve some shaky grammar in the docs, and add a note pointing
out that pg_dumpall's output can't be expected to load without any errors.
(Someday we might want to fix that, but this is not that patch.)

Haribabu Kommi, reviewed at various times by Andreas Karlsson,
Vaishnavi Prabakaran, and Robert Haas; further hacking by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJrrPGcUurV0eWTeXODwsOYFN=Ekq36t1s0YnFYUNzsmRfdAyA@mail.gmail.com
2018-01-22 14:09:09 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
8561e4840c Transaction control in PL procedures
In each of the supplied procedural languages (PL/pgSQL, PL/Perl,
PL/Python, PL/Tcl), add language-specific commit and rollback
functions/commands to control transactions in procedures in that
language.  Add similar underlying functions to SPI.  Some additional
cleanup so that transaction commit or abort doesn't blow away data
structures still used by the procedure call.  Add execution context
tracking to CALL and DO statements so that transaction control commands
can only be issued in top-level procedure and block calls, not function
calls or other procedure or block calls.

- SPI

Add a new function SPI_connect_ext() that is like SPI_connect() but
allows passing option flags.  The only option flag right now is
SPI_OPT_NONATOMIC.  A nonatomic SPI connection can execute transaction
control commands, otherwise it's not allowed.  This is meant to be
passed down from CALL and DO statements which themselves know in which
context they are called.  A nonatomic SPI connection uses different
memory management.  A normal SPI connection allocates its memory in
TopTransactionContext.  For nonatomic connections we use PortalContext
instead.  As the comment in SPI_connect_ext() (previously SPI_connect())
indicates, one could potentially use PortalContext in all cases, but it
seems safest to leave the existing uses alone, because this stuff is
complicated enough already.

SPI also gets new functions SPI_start_transaction(), SPI_commit(), and
SPI_rollback(), which can be used by PLs to implement their transaction
control logic.

- portalmem.c

Some adjustments were made in the code that cleans up portals at
transaction abort.  The portal code could already handle a command
*committing* a transaction and continuing (e.g., VACUUM), but it was not
quite prepared for a command *aborting* a transaction and continuing.

In AtAbort_Portals(), remove the code that marks an active portal as
failed.  As the comment there already predicted, this doesn't work if
the running command wants to keep running after transaction abort.  And
it's actually not necessary, because pquery.c is careful to run all
portal code in a PG_TRY block and explicitly runs MarkPortalFailed() if
there is an exception.  So the code in AtAbort_Portals() is never used
anyway.

In AtAbort_Portals() and AtCleanup_Portals(), we need to be careful not
to clean up active portals too much.  This mirrors similar code in
PreCommit_Portals().

- PL/Perl

Gets new functions spi_commit() and spi_rollback()

- PL/pgSQL

Gets new commands COMMIT and ROLLBACK.

Update the PL/SQL porting example in the documentation to reflect that
transactions are now possible in procedures.

- PL/Python

Gets new functions plpy.commit and plpy.rollback.

- PL/Tcl

Gets new commands commit and rollback.

Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndquadrant.com>
2018-01-22 08:43:06 -05:00
Robert Haas
2f17844104 Allow UPDATE to move rows between partitions.
When an UPDATE causes a row to no longer match the partition
constraint, try to move it to a different partition where it does
match the partition constraint.  In essence, the UPDATE is split into
a DELETE from the old partition and an INSERT into the new one.  This
can lead to surprising behavior in concurrency scenarios because
EvalPlanQual rechecks won't work as they normally did; the known
problems are documented.  (There is a pending patch to improve the
situation further, but it needs more review.)

Amit Khandekar, reviewed and tested by Amit Langote, David Rowley,
Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Dilip Kumar, Amul Sul, Thomas Munro, Álvaro
Herrera, Amit Kapila, and me.  A few final revisions by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAJ3gD9do9o2ccQ7j7+tSgiE1REY65XRiMb=yJO3u3QhyP8EEPQ@mail.gmail.com
2018-01-19 15:33:06 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
8b08f7d482 Local partitioned indexes
When CREATE INDEX is run on a partitioned table, create catalog entries
for an index on the partitioned table (which is just a placeholder since
the table proper has no data of its own), and recurse to create actual
indexes on the existing partitions; create them in future partitions
also.

As a convenience gadget, if the new index definition matches some
existing index in partitions, these are picked up and used instead of
creating new ones.  Whichever way these indexes come about, they become
attached to the index on the parent table and are dropped alongside it,
and cannot be dropped on isolation unless they are detached first.

To support pg_dump'ing these indexes, add commands
    CREATE INDEX ON ONLY <table>
(which creates the index on the parent partitioned table, without
recursing) and
    ALTER INDEX ATTACH PARTITION
(which is used after the indexes have been created individually on each
partition, to attach them to the parent index).  These reconstruct prior
database state exactly.

Reviewed-by: (in alphabetical order) Peter Eisentraut, Robert Haas, Amit
	Langote, Jesper Pedersen, Simon Riggs, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171113170646.gzweigyrgg6pwsg4@alvherre.pgsql
2018-01-19 11:49:22 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
a063d842f8 doc: Expand documentation of session_replication_role 2018-01-18 09:34:51 -05:00
Teodor Sigaev
bc7fa0c15c Improve scripting language in pgbench
Added:
 - variable now might contain integer, double, boolean and null values
 - functions ln, exp
 - logical AND/OR/NOT
 - bitwise AND/OR/NOT/XOR
 - bit right/left shift
 - comparison operators
 - IS [NOT] (NULL|TRUE|FALSE)
 - conditional choice (in form of when/case/then)

New operations and functions allow to implement more complicated test scenario.

Author: Fabien Coelho with minor editorization by me
Reviewed-By: Pavel Stehule, Jeevan Ladhe, me
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/alpine.DEB.2.10.1604030742390.31618@sto
2018-01-09 18:02:04 +03:00
Robert Haas
7a727c180a Add pow(), aka power(), function to pgbench.
Raúl Marín Rodríguez, reviewed by Fabien Coelho and Michael Paquier,
with a minor fix by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM6_UM4XiA14y9HnDqu9kAAOtwMhHZxW--q_ZACZW9Hsrsf-tg@mail.gmail.com
2017-12-27 10:45:45 -08:00
Teodor Sigaev
1fcd0adeb3 Add approximated Zipfian-distributed random generator to pgbench.
Generator helps to make close to real-world tests.

Author: Alik Khilazhev
Reviewed-By: Fabien COELHO
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/BF3B6F54-68C3-417A-BFAB-FB4D66F2B410@postgrespro.ru
2017-12-14 14:30:22 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
e4128ee767 SQL procedures
This adds a new object type "procedure" that is similar to a function
but does not have a return type and is invoked by the new CALL statement
instead of SELECT or similar.  This implementation is aligned with the
SQL standard and compatible with or similar to other SQL implementations.

This commit adds new commands CALL, CREATE/ALTER/DROP PROCEDURE, as well
as ALTER/DROP ROUTINE that can refer to either a function or a
procedure (or an aggregate function, as an extension to SQL).  There is
also support for procedures in various utility commands such as COMMENT
and GRANT, as well as support in pg_dump and psql.  Support for defining
procedures is available in all the languages supplied by the core
distribution.

While this commit is mainly syntax sugar around existing functionality,
future features will rely on having procedures as a separate object
type.

Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-11-30 11:03:20 -05:00
Dean Rasheed
26329ad8dc Fix broken XML in CREATE POLICY sgml.
Commit 87c2a17fee failed to close some tags (necessary now that the
SGML docs are in fact XML).
2017-11-24 13:59:25 +00:00
Dean Rasheed
87c2a17fee Doc: add a summary table to the CREATE POLICY docs.
This table summarizes which RLS policy expressions apply to each
command type, and whether they apply to the old or new tuples (or
both), which saves reading through a lot of text.

Rod Taylor, hacked on by me. Reviewed by Fabien Coelho.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHz80e4HxJShm6m9ZWFrHW=pgd2KP=RZmfFnEccujtPMiAOW5Q@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-24 12:01:18 +00:00
Peter Eisentraut
3c49c6facb Convert documentation to DocBook XML
Since some preparation work had already been done, the only source
changes left were changing empty-element tags like <xref linkend="foo">
to <xref linkend="foo"/>, and changing the DOCTYPE.

The source files are still named *.sgml, but they are actually XML files
now.  Renaming could be considered later.

In the build system, the intermediate step to convert from SGML to XML
is removed.  Everything is build straight from the source files again.
The OpenSP (or the old SP) package is no longer needed.

The documentation toolchain instructions are updated and are much
simpler now.

Peter Eisentraut, Alexander Lakhin, Jürgen Purtz
2017-11-23 09:44:28 -05:00
Tom Lane
16827d4424 pgbench: fix stats reporting when some transactions are skipped.
pgbench can skip some transactions when both -R and -L options are used.
Previously, this resulted in slightly silly statistics both in progress
reports and final output, because the skipped transactions were counted
as executed for TPS and related stats.  Discount skipped xacts in TPS
numbers, and also when figuring the percentage of xacts exceeding the
latency limit.

Also, don't print per-script skipped-transaction counts when there is
only one script.  That's redundant with the overall count, and it's
inconsistent with the fact that we don't print other per-script stats
when there's only one script.  Clean up some unnecessary interactions
between what should be independent options that were due to that
decision.

While at it, avoid division-by-zero in cases where no transactions were
executed.  While on modern platforms this would generally result in
printing "NaN" rather than a crash, that isn't spelled consistently
across platforms and it would confuse many people.  Skip the relevant
output entirely when practical, else print zeroes.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Steve Singer, additional hacking by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/26654.1505232433@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-11-21 17:30:48 -05:00
Tom Lane
41761265e8 Doc: fix broken markup. 2017-11-21 16:37:11 -05:00
Simon Riggs
c2513365a0 Parameter toast_tuple_target controls TOAST for new rows
Specifies the point at which we try to move long column values
into TOAST tables.

No effect on existing rows.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKsVmw6CX6YP9z7zqkTzcKV1+Uzr3XjKcZW=2Ya00OyQQ@mail.gmail.com

Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndQudrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndQuadrant.com>
2017-11-20 09:50:10 +11:00
Tom Lane
591c504fad Allow running just selected steps of pgbench's initialization sequence.
This feature caters to specialized use-cases such as running the normal
pgbench scenario with nonstandard indexes, or inserting other actions
between steps of the initialization sequence.  The normal sequence of
initialization actions is broken down into half a dozen steps which can
be executed in a user-specified order, to the extent to which that's
sensible.  The actions themselves aren't changed, except to make them
more robust against nonstandard uses:

* all four tables are now dropped in one DROP command, to reduce
assumptions about what foreign key relationships exist;

* all four tables are now truncated at the start of the data load
step, for consistency;

* the foreign key creation commands now specify constraint names, to
prevent accidentally creating duplicate constraints by executing the
'f' step twice.

Make some cosmetic adjustments in the messages emitted by pgbench
so that it's clear which steps are getting run, and so that the
messages agree with the documented names of the steps.

In passing, fix failure to enforce that the -v option is used only
in benchmarking mode.

Masahiko Sawada, reviewed by Fabien Coelho, editorialized a bit by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoCsz0ZzfCFcxYZ+PUdpkDd5VsCSG0Pre_-K1EgokCDFYA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-13 16:40:09 -05:00
Robert Haas
1aba8e651a Add hash partitioning.
Hash partitioning is useful when you want to partition a growing data
set evenly.  This can be useful to keep table sizes reasonable, which
makes maintenance operations such as VACUUM faster, or to enable
partition-wise join.

At present, we still depend on constraint exclusion for partitioning
pruning, and the shape of the partition constraints for hash
partitioning is such that that doesn't work.  Work is underway to fix
that, which should both improve performance and make partitioning
pruning work with hash partitioning.

Amul Sul, reviewed and tested by Dilip Kumar, Ashutosh Bapat, Yugo
Nagata, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Jesper Pedersen, and by me.  A few
final tweaks also by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b96fhpJAP=ALbETmeLk1Uni_GFZD938zgenhF49qgDTjaQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-09 18:07:44 -05:00
Stephen Frost
0fe2780db4 Remove inbound links to sql-createuser
CREATE USER is an alias for CREATE ROLE, not its own command any longer,
so clean up references to the 'sql-createuser' link to go to
'sql-createrole' instead.

In passing, change a few cases of 'CREATE USER' to be
'CREATE ROLE ...  LOGIN'.  The remaining cases appear reasonable and
also mention the distinction between 'CREATE ROLE' and 'CREATE USER'.
Also, don't say CREATE USER "assumes" LOGIN, but rather "includes".

Patch-by: David G. Johnston, with assumes->includes by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwYrbhKV8hH4TEABrDRBwf=gKremF=mLPQ6X2yGqxgFpYA@mail.gmail.com
2017-10-31 14:04:49 -04:00
Robert Haas
5f3971291f pg_receivewal: Add --no-sync option.
Michael Paquier, reviewed by Kuntal Ghosh and by me.  I did a little
wordsmithing on the documentation, too.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAB7nPqTuXuyEoVKcWcExh_b0uAjgWd_14KfGLrCTccBZ=VA0KA@mail.gmail.com
2017-10-29 12:46:55 +05:30
Robert Haas
9f295c08f8 Add table_constraint synopsis to ALTER TABLE documentation.
This is already present in the CREATE TABLE documentation, but it's
nicer not to have to refer to CREATE TABLE to find out the syntax
for ALTER TABLE.

Lætitia Avrot
2017-10-28 11:20:00 +02:00
Tom Lane
e4fbf22831 Doc: mention that you can't PREPARE TRANSACTION after NOTIFY.
The NOTIFY page said this already, but the PREPARE TRANSACTION page
missed it.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171024010602.1488.80066@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-10-27 10:46:29 -04:00
Tom Lane
a32c0923b4 Documentation improvements around domain types.
I was a bit surprised to find that domains were almost completely
unmentioned in the main SGML documentation, outside of the reference
pages for CREATE/ALTER/DROP DOMAIN.  In particular, noplace was it
mentioned that we don't support domains over composite, making it
hard to document the planned fix for that.

Hence, add a section about domains to chapter 8 (Data Types).

Also, modernize the type system overview in section 37.2; it had never
heard of range types, and insisted on calling arrays base types, which
seems a bit odd from a user's perspective; furthermore it didn't fit well
with the fact that we now support arrays over types other than base types.
It seems appropriate to use the term "container types" to describe all of
arrays, composites, and ranges, so let's do that.

Also a few other minor improvements, notably improve an example query
in rowtypes.sgml by using a LATERAL function instead of an ad-hoc
OFFSET 0 clause.

In part this is mop-up for commit c12d570fa, which missed updating 37.2
to reflect the fact that it added arrays of domains.  We could possibly
back-patch this without that claim, but I don't feel a strong need to.
2017-10-24 14:08:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
1ff01b3902 Convert SGML IDs to lower case
IDs in SGML are case insensitive, and we have accumulated a mix of upper
and lower case IDs, including different variants of the same ID.  In
XML, these will be case sensitive, so we need to fix up those
differences.  Going to all lower case seems most straightforward, and
the current build process already makes all anchors and lower case
anyway during the SGML->XML conversion, so this doesn't create any
difference in the output right now.  A future XML-only build process
would, however, maintain any mixed case ID spellings in the output, so
that is another reason to clean this up beforehand.

Author: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
2017-10-20 19:26:10 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
bf54c0f05c Make OWNER TO subcommand mention consistent
We say 'OWNER TO' in the synopsis; let's use that form elsewhere.

There is a paragraph in the <note> section that refers to various
subcommands very loosely (including OWNER); I didn't think it was an
improvement to change that one.

This is a fairly inconsequential change, so no backpatch.

Author: Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/69ec7b51-03e5-f523-95ce-c070ee790e70@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-10-18 13:32:45 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
c29c578908 Don't use SGML empty tags
For DocBook XML compatibility, don't use SGML empty tags (</>) anymore,
replace by the full tag name.  Add a warning option to catch future
occurrences.

Alexander Lakhin, Jürgen Purtz
2017-10-17 15:10:33 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
6ecabead4b REASSIGN OWNED BY doc: s/privileges/membership/
Reported by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwajWqjqEL9xc1xnnmTyBg32EdAZKJXijzigbosGSs_vag@mail.gmail.com
2017-10-17 11:45:34 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
d8794fd7c3 doc: Postgres -> PostgreSQL 2017-10-15 09:14:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
4de2d4fba3 Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state.
Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates'
final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set
aggregates' final functions always do.  This has always been a bit
limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the
built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states.
Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure
that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly.

There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely
read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes
the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the
state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns.  There are no
examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in
OSAs act like that.

This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support
for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging,
if their implementations cannot handle that.  While it was previously
possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was
not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is
something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for.  But better late
than never.

In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into
a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for
some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe
for frontend files to include.  This lets pg_dump use the symbolic
names for relevant constants.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 15:21:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
2860596832 Doc: fix missing explanation of default object privileges.
The GRANT reference page, which lists the default privileges for new
objects, failed to mention that USAGE is granted by default for data
types and domains.  As a lesser sin, it also did not specify anything
about the initial privileges for sequences, FDWs, foreign servers,
or large objects.  Fix that, and add a comment to acldefault() in the
probably vain hope of getting people to maintain this list in future.

Noted by Laurenz Albe, though I editorialized on the wording a bit.
Back-patch to all supported branches, since they all have this behavior.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1507620895.4152.1.camel@cybertec.at
2017-10-11 16:57:14 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
44b3230e82 Use lower-case SGML attribute values
for DocBook XML compatibility
2017-10-10 10:15:57 -04:00
Tom Lane
11d8d72c27 Allow multiple tables to be specified in one VACUUM or ANALYZE command.
Not much to say about this; does what it says on the tin.

However, formerly, if there was a column list then the ANALYZE action was
implied; now it must be specified, or you get an error.  This is because
it would otherwise be a bit unclear what the user meant if some tables
have column lists and some don't.

Nathan Bossart, reviewed by Michael Paquier and Masahiko Sawada, with some
editorialization by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E061A8E3-5E3D-494D-94F0-E8A9B312BBFC@amazon.com
2017-10-03 18:53:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f41bd4cb90 Expand collation documentation
Document better how to create custom collations and what locale strings
ICU accepts.  Explain the ICU examples in more detail.  Also update the
text on the CREATE COLLATION reference page a bit to take ICU more into
account.
2017-10-02 11:51:45 -04:00
Tom Lane
28e0727076 Revert to 9.6 treatment of ALTER TYPE enumtype ADD VALUE.
This reverts commit 15bc038f9, along with the followon commits 1635e80d3
and 984c92074 that tried to clean up the problems exposed by bug #14825.
The result was incomplete because it failed to address parallel-query
requirements.  With 10.0 release so close upon us, now does not seem like
the time to be adding more code to fix that.  I hope we can un-revert this
code and add the missing parallel query support during the v11 cycle.

Back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170922185904.1448.16585@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-27 16:14:43 -04:00
Dean Rasheed
af44cbd5ec Improve the CREATE POLICY documentation.
Provide a correct description of how multiple policies are combined,
clarify when SELECT permissions are required, mention SELECT FOR
UPDATE/SHARE, and do some other more minor tidying up.

Reviewed by Stephen Frost

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCVrxyYbOFU8XbGHicz%2BmXPYzw%3DhfNL2XTphDt-53TomQQ%40mail.gmail.com

Back-patch to 9.5.
2017-09-27 17:16:15 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
3709ca1cf0 pg_basebackup: Add option to create replication slot
When requesting a particular replication slot, the new pg_basebackup
option -C/--create-slot creates it before starting to replicate from it.

Further refactor the slot creation logic to include the temporary slot
creation logic into the same function.  Add new arguments is_temporary
and preserve_wal to CreateReplicationSlot().  Print in --verbose mode
that a slot has been created.

Author: Michael Banck <michael.banck@credativ.de>
2017-09-27 08:49:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
984c92074d Remove heuristic same-transaction test from check_safe_enum_use().
The blacklist mechanism added by the preceding commit directly fixes
most of the practical cases that the same-transaction test was meant
to cover.  What remains is use-cases like

	begin;
	create type e as enum('x');
	alter type e add value 'y';
	-- use 'y' somehow
	commit;

However, because the same-transaction test is heuristic, it fails on
small variants of that, such as renaming the type or changing its
owner.  Rather than try to explain the behavior to users, let's
remove it and just have a rule that the newly added value can't be
used before being committed, full stop.  Perhaps later it will be
worth the implementation effort and overhead to have a more accurate
test for type-was-created-in-this-transaction.  We'll wait for some
field experience with v10 before deciding to do that.

Back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170922185904.1448.16585@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-26 13:14:46 -04:00
Tom Lane
1635e80d30 Use a blacklist to distinguish original from add-on enum values.
Commit 15bc038f9 allowed ALTER TYPE ADD VALUE to be executed inside
transaction blocks, by disallowing the use of the added value later
in the same transaction, except under limited circumstances.  However,
the test for "limited circumstances" was heuristic and could reject
references to enum values that were created during CREATE TYPE AS ENUM,
not just later.  This breaks the use-case of restoring pg_dump scripts
in a single transaction, as reported in bug #14825 from Balazs Szilfai.

We can improve this by keeping a "blacklist" table of enum value OIDs
created by ALTER TYPE ADD VALUE during the current transaction.  Any
visible-but-uncommitted value whose OID is not in the blacklist must
have been created by CREATE TYPE AS ENUM, and can be used safely
because it could not have a lifespan shorter than its parent enum type.

This change also removes the restriction that a renamed enum value
can't be used before being committed (unless it was on the blacklist).

Andrew Dunstan, with cosmetic improvements by me.
Back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170922185904.1448.16585@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-26 13:14:46 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
15a8010ed6 Sort pg_basebackup options better
The --slot option somehow ended up under options controlling the output,
and some other options were in a nonsensical place or were not moved
after recent renamings, so tidy all that up a bit.
2017-09-26 11:58:22 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
91ad8b416c doc: Document commands that cannot be run in a transaction block
Mainly covering the new CREATE SUBSCRIPTION and DROP SUBSCRIPTION, but
ALTER DATABASE SET TABLESPACE was also missing.
2017-09-22 15:01:13 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
d57c7a7c50 Provide a test for variable existence in psql
"\if :{?variable_name}" will be translated to "\if TRUE" if the variable
exists and "\if FALSE" otherwise. Thus it will be possible to execute code
conditionally on the existence of the variable, regardless of its value.

Fabien Coelho, with some review by Robins Tharakan and some light text
editing by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1708260835520.3627@lancre
2017-09-21 19:02:23 -04:00
Tom Lane
36b564c648 Fix erroneous documentation about noise word GROUP.
GRANT, REVOKE, and some allied commands allow the noise word GROUP
before a role name (cf. grantee production in gram.y).  This option
does not exist elsewhere, but it had nonetheless snuck into the
documentation for ALTER ROLE, ALTER USER, and CREATE SCHEMA.

Seems to be a copy-and-pasteo in commit 31eae6028, which did expand the
syntax choices here, but not in that way.  Back-patch to 9.5 where that
came in.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170916123750.8885.66941@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-20 11:10:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
00210e3fb9 docs: re-add instructions on setting wal_level for rsync use
This step was erroneously removed four days ago by me.

Reported-by: Magnus via IM

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-20 09:36:19 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
2c74e6c1dc Mention need for --no-inc-recursive in rsync command
Since rsync 3.0.0 (released in 2008), the default way to enumerate
changes was changed in a way that makes it less likely that the hardlink
sync mode works. Since the whole point of the documented procedure is
for the hardlinks to work, change our docs to suggest using the
backwards compatibility switch.
2017-09-20 14:09:05 +02:00
Andres Freund
fc49e24fa6 Make WAL segment size configurable at initdb time.
For performance reasons a larger segment size than the default 16MB
can be useful. A larger segment size has two main benefits: Firstly,
in setups using archiving, it makes it easier to write scripts that
can keep up with higher amounts of WAL, secondly, the WAL has to be
written and synced to disk less frequently.

But at the same time large segment size are disadvantageous for
smaller databases. So far the segment size had to be configured at
compile time, often making it unrealistic to choose one fitting to a
particularly load. Therefore change it to a initdb time setting.

This includes a breaking changes to the xlogreader.h API, which now
requires the current segment size to be configured.  For that and
similar reasons a number of binaries had to be taught how to recognize
the current segment size.

Author: Beena Emerson, editorialized by Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, David Steele, Kuntal Ghosh, Michael
    Paquier, Peter Eisentraut, Robert Hass, Tushar Ahuja
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOG9ApEAcQ--1ieKbhFzXSQPw_YLmepaa4hNdnY5+ZULpt81Mw@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-19 22:03:48 -07:00
Tom Lane
fd31f9f033 Ensure that BEFORE STATEMENT triggers fire the right number of times.
Commit 0f79440fb introduced mechanism to keep AFTER STATEMENT triggers
from firing more than once per statement, which was formerly possible
if more than one FK enforcement action had to be applied to a given
table.  Add a similar mechanism for BEFORE STATEMENT triggers, so that
we don't have the unexpected situation of firing BEFORE STATEMENT
triggers more often than AFTER STATEMENT.

As with the previous patch, back-patch to v10.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/22315.1505584992@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-09-17 12:16:38 -04:00
Tom Lane
0f79440fb0 Fix SQL-spec incompatibilities in new transition table feature.
The standard says that all changes of the same kind (insert, update, or
delete) caused in one table by a single SQL statement should be reported
in a single transition table; and by that, they mean to include foreign key
enforcement actions cascading from the statement's direct effects.  It's
also reasonable to conclude that if the standard had wCTEs, they would say
that effects of wCTEs applying to the same table as each other or the outer
statement should be merged into one transition table.  We weren't doing it
like that.

Hence, arrange to merge tuples from multiple update actions into a single
transition table as much as we can.  There is a problem, which is that if
the firing of FK enforcement triggers and after-row triggers with
transition tables is interspersed, we might need to report more tuples
after some triggers have already seen the transition table.  It seems like
a bad idea for the transition table to be mutable between trigger calls.
There's no good way around this without a major redesign of the FK logic,
so for now, resolve it by opening a new transition table each time this
happens.

Also, ensure that AFTER STATEMENT triggers fire just once per statement,
or once per transition table when we're forced to make more than one.
Previous versions of Postgres have allowed each FK enforcement query
to cause an additional firing of the AFTER STATEMENT triggers for the
referencing table, but that's certainly not per spec.  (We're still
doing multiple firings of BEFORE STATEMENT triggers, though; is that
something worth changing?)

Also, forbid using transition tables with column-specific UPDATE triggers.
The spec requires such transition tables to show only the tuples for which
the UPDATE trigger would have fired, which means maintaining multiple
transition tables or else somehow filtering the contents at readout.
Maybe someday we'll bother to support that option, but it looks like a
lot of trouble for a marginal feature.

The transition tables are now managed by the AfterTriggers data structures,
rather than being directly the responsibility of ModifyTable nodes.  This
removes a subtransaction-lifespan memory leak introduced by my previous
band-aid patch 3c4359521.

In passing, refactor the AfterTriggers data structures to reduce the
management overhead for them, by using arrays of structs rather than
several parallel arrays for per-query-level and per-subtransaction state.

I failed to resist the temptation to do some copy-editing on the SGML
docs about triggers, above and beyond merely documenting the effects
of this patch.

Back-patch to v10, because we don't want the semantics of transition
tables to change post-release.

Patch by me, with help and review from Thomas Munro.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170909064853.25630.12825@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-09-16 13:20:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
04b64b8ddf docs: clarify pg_upgrade docs regarding standbys and rsync
Document that rsync is an _optional_ way to upgrade standbys, suggest
rsync option --dry-run, and mention a way of upgrading one standby from
another using rsync.  Also clarify some instructions by specifying if
they operate on the old or new clusters.

Reported-by: Stephen Frost, Magnus Hagander

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170914191250.GB6595@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-16 11:58:00 -04:00
Robert Haas
9361f6f54e After a MINVALUE/MAXVALUE bound, allow only more of the same.
In the old syntax, which used UNBOUNDED, we had a similar restriction,
but commit d363d42bb9, which changed the
syntax, eliminated it.  Put it back.

Patch by me, reviewed by Dean Rasheed.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobs+pLPC27tS3gOpEAxAffHrq5w509cvkwTf9pF6cWYbg@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-15 21:15:55 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
82e367ddbf docs: adjust "link mode" mention in pg_upgrade streaming steps
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-13 09:22:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9521ce4a7a docs: improve pg_upgrade standby instructions
This makes it clear that pg_upgrade standby upgrade instructions should
only be used in link mode, adds examples, and explains how rsync works
with links.

Reported-by: Andreas Joseph Krogh

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/VisenaEmail.6c.c0e592c5af4ef0a2.15e785dcb61@tc7-visena

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-13 09:11:28 -04:00
Tom Lane
69835bc898 Add psql variables to track success/failure of SQL queries.
This patch adds ERROR, SQLSTATE, and ROW_COUNT, which are updated after
every query, as well as LAST_ERROR_MESSAGE and LAST_ERROR_SQLSTATE,
which are updated only when a query fails.  The expected usage of these
is for scripting.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Pavel Stehule

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1704042158020.12290@lancre
2017-09-12 19:27:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2d4a614e1e docs: improve pg_upgrade rsync instructions
This explains how rsync accomplishes updating standby servers and
clarifies the instructions.

Reported-by: Andreas Joseph Krogh

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/VisenaEmail.10.2b4049e43870bd16.15d898d696f@tc7-visena

Backpatch-through: 9.5
2017-09-12 13:17:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6d9fa52645 pg_receivewal: Add --endpos option
This is primarily useful for making tests of this utility more
deterministic, to avoid the complexity of starting pg_receivewal as a
deamon in TAP tests.

While this is less useful than the equivalent pg_recvlogical option,
users can as well use it for example to enforce WAL streaming up to a
end-of-backup position, to save only a minimal amount of WAL.

Use this new option to stream WAL data in a deterministic way within a
new set of TAP tests.

Author: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-09-11 16:48:30 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
821fb8cdbf Message style fixes 2017-09-11 11:21:27 -04:00
Robert Haas
6f6b99d133 Allow a partitioned table to have a default partition.
Any tuples that don't route to any other partition will route to the
default partition.

Jeevan Ladhe, Beena Emerson, Ashutosh Bapat, Rahila Syed, and Robert
Haas, with review and testing at various stages by (at least) Rushabh
Lathia, Keith Fiske, Amit Langote, Amul Sul, Rajkumar Raghuanshi, Sven
Kunze, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Thom Brown, Rafia Sabih, and Dilip Kumar.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28tbN4SYyhS7YV1YBWcitkqbhSWfQCy0G=apRcC_PEO-bg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAOG9ApEYj34fWMcvBMBQ-YtqR9fTdXhdN82QEKG0SVZ6zeL1xg@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-08 17:28:04 -04:00
Tom Lane
b976499480 Improve documentation about behavior of multi-statement Query messages.
We've long done our best to sweep this topic under the rug, but in view
of recent work it seems like it's time to explain it more precisely.
Here's an initial cut at doing that.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0A3221C70F24FB45833433255569204D1F6BE40D@G01JPEXMBYT05
2017-09-07 14:04:45 -04:00
Simon Riggs
5b6d13eec7 Allow SET STATISTICS on expression indexes
Index columns are referenced by ordinal number rather than name, e.g.
CREATE INDEX coord_idx ON measured (x, y, (z + t));
ALTER INDEX coord_idx ALTER COLUMN 3 SET STATISTICS 1000;

Incompatibility note for release notes:
\d+ for indexes now also displays Stats Target

Authors: Alexander Korotkov, with contribution by Adrien NAYRAT
Review: Adrien NAYRAT, Simon Riggs
Wordsmith: Simon Riggs
2017-09-06 13:46:01 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut
1c53f612bc Escape < and & in SGML
This is not required in SGML, but will be in XML, so this is a step to
prepare for the conversion to XML.  (It is still not required to escape
>, but we did it here in some cases for symmetry.)

Add a command-line option to osx/onsgmls calls to warn about unescaped
occurrences in the future.

Author: Alexander Law <exclusion@gmail.com>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-09-06 11:22:43 -04:00
Tom Lane
49ca462eb1 Add \gdesc psql command.
This command acts somewhat like \g, but instead of executing the query
buffer, it merely prints a description of the columns that the query
result would have.  (Of course, this still requires parsing the query;
if parse analysis fails, you get an error anyway.)  We accomplish this
using an unnamed prepared statement, which should be invisible to psql
users.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRBhYVvO34FU=EKb=nAF5t3b++krKt1FneCmR0kuF5m-QA@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-05 18:17:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
5e8304fdce In psql, use PSQL_PAGER in preference to PAGER, if it's set.
This allows the user's environment to set up a psql-specific choice
of pager, in much the same way that we provide PSQL_EDITOR to allow
a psql-specific override of the more widely known EDITOR variable.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Thomas Munro

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRD3RRk9S1eRbnGm_T6brc3Ss5mohraNzTSJquzx+pmtKA@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-05 12:02:13 -04:00
Tom Lane
9ae9d8c154 Add psql variables showing server version and psql version.
We already had a psql variable VERSION that shows the verbose form of
psql's own version.  Add VERSION_NAME to show the short form (e.g.,
"11devel") and VERSION_NUM to show the numeric form (e.g., 110000).
Also add SERVER_VERSION_NAME and SERVER_VERSION_NUM to show the short and
numeric forms of the server's version.  (We'd probably add SERVER_VERSION
with the verbose string if it were readily available; but adding another
network round trip to get it seems too expensive.)

The numeric forms, in particular, are expected to be useful for scripting
purposes, now that psql can do conditional tests.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Pavel Stehule

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1704020917220.4632@lancre
2017-09-05 10:51:36 -04:00
Tom Lane
9d36a38660 Adjust pgbench to allow non-ASCII characters in variable names.
This puts it in sync with psql's notion of what is a valid variable name.
Like psql, we document that "non-Latin letters" are allowed, but actually
any non-ASCII character is accepted.

Fabien Coelho

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170405.094548.1184280384967203518.t-ishii@sraoss.co.jp
2017-09-04 13:45:20 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
afc58affb6 doc: Fix typos and other minor issues
Author: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
2017-09-01 23:34:12 -04:00
Robert Haas
84be67181a pg_dumpall: Add a -E flag to set the encoding, like pg_dump has.
Michael Paquier, reviewed by Fabien Coelho

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAB7nPqQcYWmrm2n-dVaMUhYPKFU_DxQwPuUGuC4ZF+8B=dS5xQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-01 12:24:20 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
46596f8d6b Clarify documentation
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20170618071607.GA16418%40nol.local
2017-08-27 21:29:54 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
cf851519d4 pg_dump: Support using synchronized snapshots on standbys
This became possible by commit
6c2003f8a1.  This just makes pg_dump aware
of it and updates the documentation.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-08-16 19:46:50 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0a2d43d988 doc: Document pg_receivewal exit behavior and status 2017-08-15 20:26:58 -04:00
Robert Haas
23d7680d04 pg_dump: Add a --load-via-partition-root option.
Rushabh Lathia, reviewed and somewhat revised by me.  Testing by
Rajkumar Raghuwanshi.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAGPqQf0C1he087bz9xRBOGZBuESYz9X=Fp8Ca_g+TfHgAff75g@mail.gmail.com
2017-08-14 22:54:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
fa65c8c73c doc: Update description of rolreplication column
Since PostgreSQL 9.6, rolreplication no longer determines whether a role
can run pg_start_backup() and pg_stop_backup(), so remove that.

Add that this attribute determines whether a role can create and drop
replication slots.

Reported-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
2017-08-11 16:14:55 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
22701a7ec6 doc: Small wording improvement
Author: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2017-08-11 15:52:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a1ef920e27 Remove uses of "slave" in replication contexts
This affects mostly code comments, some documentation, and tests.
Official APIs already used "standby".
2017-08-10 22:55:41 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
bf6b9e9444 Don't allow logging in with empty password.
Some authentication methods allowed it, others did not. In the client-side,
libpq does not even try to authenticate with an empty password, which makes
using empty passwords hazardous: an administrator might think that an
account with an empty password cannot be used to log in, because psql
doesn't allow it, and not realize that a different client would in fact
allow it. To clear that confusion and to be be consistent, disallow empty
passwords in all authentication methods.

All the authentication methods that used plaintext authentication over the
wire, except for BSD authentication, already checked that the password
received from the user was not empty. To avoid forgetting it in the future
again, move the check to the recv_password_packet function. That only
forbids using an empty password with plaintext authentication, however.
MD5 and SCRAM need a different fix:

* In stable branches, check that the MD5 hash stored for the user does not
not correspond to an empty string. This adds some overhead to MD5
authentication, because the server needs to compute an extra MD5 hash, but
it is not noticeable in practice.

* In HEAD, modify CREATE and ALTER ROLE to clear the password if an empty
string, or a password hash that corresponds to an empty string, is
specified. The user-visible behavior is the same as in the stable branches,
the user cannot log in, but it seems better to stop the empty password from
entering the system in the first place. Secondly, it is fairly expensive to
check that a SCRAM hash doesn't correspond to an empty string, because
computing a SCRAM hash is much more expensive than an MD5 hash by design,
so better avoid doing that on every authentication.

We could clear the password on CREATE/ALTER ROLE also in stable branches,
but we would still need to check at authentication time, because even if we
prevent empty passwords from being stored in pg_authid, there might be
existing ones there already.

Reported by Jeroen van der Ham, Ben de Graaff and Jelte Fennema.

Security: CVE-2017-7546
2017-08-07 17:03:42 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
b374481221 Further unify ROLE and USER command grammar rules
ALTER USER ... SET did not support all the syntax variants of ALTER ROLE
...  SET.  Fix that, and to avoid further deviations of this kind, unify
many the grammar rules for ROLE/USER/GROUP commands.

Reported-by: Pavel Golub <pavel@microolap.com>
2017-08-03 20:34:45 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c1bb787046 doc: Fix typo
Author: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2017-08-01 14:37:26 -04:00
Dean Rasheed
d363d42bb9 Use MINVALUE/MAXVALUE instead of UNBOUNDED for range partition bounds.
Previously, UNBOUNDED meant no lower bound when used in the FROM list,
and no upper bound when used in the TO list, which was OK for
single-column range partitioning, but problematic with multiple
columns. For example, an upper bound of (10.0, UNBOUNDED) would not be
collocated with a lower bound of (10.0, UNBOUNDED), thus making it
difficult or impossible to define contiguous multi-column range
partitions in some cases.

Fix this by using MINVALUE and MAXVALUE instead of UNBOUNDED to
represent a partition column that is unbounded below or above
respectively. This syntax removes any ambiguity, and ensures that if
one partition's lower bound equals another partition's upper bound,
then the partitions are contiguous.

Also drop the constraint prohibiting finite values after an unbounded
column, and just document the fact that any values after MINVALUE or
MAXVALUE are ignored. Previously it was necessary to repeat UNBOUNDED
multiple times, which was needlessly verbose.

Note: Forces a post-PG 10 beta2 initdb.

Report by Amul Sul, original patch by Amit Langote with some
additional hacking by me.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b947mowpLdxL3jo3YLKngRjrq9+Ej4ymduQTfYR+8=YAYQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-07-21 09:20:47 +01:00
Tom Lane
ed3dc224e5 Doc: clarify description of degenerate NATURAL joins.
Claiming that NATURAL JOIN is equivalent to CROSS JOIN when there are
no common column names is only strictly correct if it's an inner join;
you can't say e.g. CROSS LEFT JOIN.  Better to explain it as meaning
JOIN ON TRUE, instead.  Per a suggestion from David Johnston.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwb+mYszQhDS9f_dqRrk1=Pe-S6D=XMkAXcDf4ykKPmgKQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-07-20 12:41:26 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
1bac5f552a pg_ctl: Make failure to complete operation a nonzero exit
If an operation being waited for does not complete within the timeout,
then exit with a nonzero exit status.  This was previously handled
inconsistently.
2017-07-05 13:37:08 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5191e357cf psql documentation fixes
Update the documentation for \pset to mention
columns|linestyle|pager_min_lines.  Add various mentions of \pset
command equivalences that were previously inconsistent.

Author: Дилян Палаузов <dpa-postgres@aegee.org>
2017-07-04 21:10:08 -04:00
Andrew Gierth
501ed02cf6 Fix transition tables for partition/inheritance.
We disallow row-level triggers with transition tables on child tables.
Transition tables for triggers on the parent table contain only those
columns present in the parent.  (We can't mix tuple formats in a
single transition table.)

Patch by Thomas Munro

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BTgmoZzTBBAsEUh4MazAN7ga%3D8SsMC-Knp-6cetts9yNZUCcg%40mail.gmail.com
2017-06-28 18:55:03 +01:00
Tom Lane
de0c60b7d3 Doc: minor improvements for collation-related man pages. 2017-06-25 12:27:04 -04:00
Tom Lane
ba63dbd9ed Upgrade documentation connected with shared_preload_libraries et al.
Noplace in the documentation actually defined what these variables
contain.  Define them as lists of arguments for LOAD, and improve
that command's documentation a bit.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-oJtxHVDc3H+Km3CjB9mY1VDzuyaVH_ZYSz7iXcRqCtb93Ew@mail.gmail.com
2017-06-20 13:40:06 -04:00
Tom Lane
d14c85ed1a Fix materialized-view documentation oversights.
When materialized views were added, psql's \d commands were made to
treat them as a separate object category ... but not everyplace in the
documentation or comments got the memo.

Noted by David Johnston.  Back-patch to 9.3 where matviews came in.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwb27M3VXRhHErjCpkWwN9eKThbqWb1=trtoXi9_ejqPXQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-06-19 18:32:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
1c25ef6363 doc: Improve logical replication security setup info
Reported-by: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2017-06-19 17:30:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
bbaf9e8f84 Documentation spell checking and markup improvements 2017-06-18 14:02:12 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
81a4dcf2f2 Fix copy/paste error in docs
Author: Julien Rouhaud <julien.rouhaud@dalibo.com>
2017-06-18 19:41:46 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
806dccee23 doc: Fix typo
Author: Julien Rouhaud <julien.rouhaud@dalibo.com>
2017-06-17 10:21:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
57fb1d677d doc: Add note that COPY commands are published as INSERTs 2017-06-16 21:04:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
07fb943335 doc: remove mention of Windows junction points by pg_upgrade
pg_upgrade never used Windows junction points but instead always used
Windows hard links.

Reported-by: Adrian Klaver

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6a638c60-90bb-4921-8ee4-5fdad68f8b09@aklaver.com

Backpatch-through: 9.3, where the mention first appeared
2017-06-15 13:25:45 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0f33a719fd docs: Fix pg_upgrade standby server upgrade docs
It was unsafe to instruct users to start/stop the server after
pg_upgrade was run but before the standby servers were rsync'ed.  The
new instructions avoid this.

RELEASE NOTES:  This fix should be mentioned in the minor release notes.

Reported-by: Dmitriy Sarafannikov and Sergey Burladyan

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87wp8o506b.fsf@seb.koffice.internal

Backpatch-through: 9.5, where standby server upgrade instructions first appeared
2017-06-15 12:30:02 -04:00
Andres Freund
6c2003f8a1 Don't force-assign transaction id when exporting a snapshot.
Previously we required every exported transaction to have an xid
assigned. That was used to check that the exporting transaction is
still running, which in turn is needed to guarantee that that
necessary rows haven't been removed in between exporting and importing
the snapshot.

The exported xid caused unnecessary problems with logical decoding,
because slot creation has to wait for all concurrent xid to finish,
which in turn serializes concurrent slot creation.   It also
prohibited snapshots to be exported on hot-standby replicas.

Instead export the virtual transactionid, which avoids the unnecessary
serialization and the inability to export snapshots on standbys. This
changes the file name of the exported snapshot, but since we never
documented what that one means, that seems ok.

Author: Petr Jelinek, slightly editorialized by me
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f598b4b8-8cd7-0d54-0939-adda763d8c34@2ndquadrant.com
2017-06-14 11:57:21 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut
f0cfff9da2 doc: Whitespace fixes in man pages 2017-06-14 13:56:04 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0d9bdbcaae Put documentation of options and commands in more alphabetical order 2017-06-14 11:10:17 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
39da0f709d doc: Update example version numbers in pg_upgrade documentation
The exact numbers don't matter, since they are examples, but it was
looking quite dated.

For the target version, we now automatically substitute the current
major version.  The updated example source version should be good for a
couple of years.
2017-06-13 16:10:11 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
bf6e4c3c82 Trim trailing whitespace 2017-06-12 09:51:18 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
eab86897bd Fix ALTER TABLE doc examples.
Patch by Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>.  Confirmed by Amit
Langote, who is the original author of the document part.
2017-06-12 14:49:25 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
0933fcee98 doc: Document that subscriptions to same server might hang 2017-06-09 17:14:06 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7ff9812f9a Put new command-line options in alphabetical order 2017-06-08 12:12:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
0198c277a2 Docs: improve CREATE TABLE ref page's discussion of partition bounds.
Clarify in the syntax synopsis that partition bound values must be
exactly numeric literals or string literals; previously it
said "bound_literal" which was defined nowhere.

Replace confusing --- and, I think, incorrect in detail --- definition
of how range bounds work with a reference to row-wise comparison plus
a concrete example (which I stole from Robert Haas).

Minor copy-editing in the same area.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/30475.1496005465@sss.pgh.pa.us
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28106.1496041449@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-06-07 17:23:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
9907b55ceb Fix ALTER SUBSCRIPTION grammar ambiguity
There was a grammar ambiguity between SET PUBLICATION name REFRESH and
SET PUBLICATION SKIP REFRESH, because SKIP is not a reserved word.  To
resolve that, fold the refresh choice into the WITH options.  Refreshing
is the default now.

Reported-by: tushar <tushar.ahuja@enterprisedb.com>
2017-06-05 21:43:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
de492c17f0 doc: Add note that DROP SUBSCRIPTION drops replication slot
Add some information about what to do when this fails.
2017-06-02 15:16:57 -04:00
Andres Freund
3d79013b97 Make ALTER SEQUENCE, including RESTART, fully transactional.
Previously the changes to the "data" part of the sequence, i.e. the
one containing the current value, were not transactional, whereas the
definition, including minimum and maximum value were.  That leads to
odd behaviour if a schema change is rolled back, with the potential
that out-of-bound sequence values can be returned.

To avoid the issue create a new relfilenode fork whenever ALTER
SEQUENCE is executed, similar to how TRUNCATE ... RESTART IDENTITY
already is already handled.

This commit also makes ALTER SEQUENCE RESTART transactional, as it
seems to be too confusing to have some forms of ALTER SEQUENCE behave
transactionally, some forms not.  This way setval() and nextval() are
not transactional, but DDL is, which seems to make sense.

This commit also rolls back parts of the changes made in 3d092fe540
and f8dc1985f as they're now not needed anymore.

Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170522154227.nvafbsm62sjpbxvd@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: Bug is in master/v10 only
2017-06-01 14:19:33 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut
185364b161 doc: Fix ALTER PUBLICATION details
Some of the text was made nonsensical by commit
e950024066.  Fix that and make some other
minor changes.

Reported-by: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2017-05-30 11:48:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
f3db7f164a Prevent running pg_resetwal/pg_resetxlog against wrong-version data dirs.
pg_resetwal (formerly pg_resetxlog) doesn't insist on finding a matching
version number in pg_control, and that seems like an important thing to
preserve since recovering from corrupt pg_control is a prime reason to
need to run it.  However, that means you can try to run it against a
data directory of a different major version, which is at best useless
and at worst disastrous.  So as to provide some protection against that
type of pilot error, inspect PG_VERSION at startup and refuse to do
anything if it doesn't match.  PG_VERSION is read-only after initdb,
so it's unlikely to get corrupted, and even if it were corrupted it would
be easy to fix by hand.

This hazard has been there all along, so back-patch to all supported
branches.

Michael Paquier, with some kibitzing by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f4b8eb91-b934-8a0d-b3cc-68f06e2279d1@enterprisedb.com
2017-05-29 17:08:16 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
eb67e2e35a extended stats: Clarify behavior of omitting stat type clause
Pointed out by Jeff Janes
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMkU=1zGhK-nW10RAXhokcT3MM=YBg=j5LkG9RMDwmu3i0H0Og@mail.gmail.com
2017-05-25 13:22:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f4205c4c1f doc: Fix ALTER SUBSCRIPTION option syntax synopsis
Author: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
2017-05-18 21:39:06 -04:00
Robert Haas
3ec76ff1f2 Don't explicitly mark range partitioning columns NOT NULL.
This seemed like a good idea originally because there's no way to mark
a range partition as accepting NULL, but that now seems more like a
current limitation than something we want to lock down for all time.
For example, there's a proposal to add the notion of a default
partition which accepts all rows not otherwise routed, which directly
conflicts with the idea that a range-partitioned table should never
allow nulls anywhere.  So let's change this while we still can, by
putting the NOT NULL test into the partition constraint instead of
changing the column properties.

Amit Langote and Robert Haas, reviewed by Amit Kapila

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/8e2dd63d-c6fb-bb74-3c2b-ed6d63629c9d@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-05-18 13:49:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
6accefd466 Update CREATE SUBSCRIPTION docs for recent syntax change.
Masahiko Sawada
2017-05-15 22:06:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f8dc1985fd Fix ALTER SEQUENCE locking
In 1753b1b027, the pg_sequence system
catalog was introduced.  This made sequence metadata changes
transactional, while the actual sequence values are still behaving
nontransactionally.  This requires some refinement in how ALTER
SEQUENCE, which operates on both, locks the sequence and the catalog.

The main problems were:

- Concurrent ALTER SEQUENCE causes "tuple concurrently updated" error,
  caused by updates to pg_sequence catalog.

- Sequence WAL writes and catalog updates are not protected by same
  lock, which could lead to inconsistent recovery order.

- nextval() disregarding uncommitted ALTER SEQUENCE changes.

To fix, nextval() and friends now lock the sequence using
RowExclusiveLock instead of AccessShareLock.  ALTER SEQUENCE locks the
sequence using ShareRowExclusiveLock.  This means that nextval() and
ALTER SEQUENCE block each other, and ALTER SEQUENCE on the same sequence
blocks itself.  (This was already the case previously for the OWNER TO,
RENAME, and SET SCHEMA variants.)  Also, rearrange some code so that the
entire AlterSequence is protected by the lock on the sequence.

As an exception, use reduced locking for ALTER SEQUENCE ... RESTART.
Since that is basically a setval(), it does not require the full locking
of other ALTER SEQUENCE actions.  So check whether we are only running a
RESTART and run with less locking if so.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
Reported-by: Jason Petersen <jason@citusdata.com>
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
2017-05-15 10:19:57 -04:00
Tom Lane
93ece9cc88 Edit SGML documentation related to extended statistics.
Use the "statistics object" terminology uniformly here too.  Assorted
copy-editing.  Put new catalogs.sgml sections into alphabetical order.
2017-05-14 19:15:52 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
bc085205c8 Change CREATE STATISTICS syntax
Previously, we had the WITH clause in the middle of the command, where
you'd specify both generic options as well as statistic types.  Few
people liked this, so this commit changes it to remove the WITH keyword
from that clause and makes it accept statistic types only.  (We
currently don't have any generic options, but if we invent in the
future, we will gain a new WITH clause, probably at the end of the
command).

Also, the column list is now specified without parens, which makes the
whole command look more similar to a SELECT command.  This change will
let us expand the command to supporting expressions (not just columns
names) as well as multiple tables and their join conditions.

Tom added lots of code comments and fixed some parts of the CREATE
STATISTICS reference page, too; more changes in this area are
forthcoming.  He also fixed a potential problem in the alter_generic
regression test, reducing verbosity on a cascaded drop to avoid
dependency on message ordering, as we do in other tests.

Tom also closed a security bug: we documented that table ownership was
required in order to create a statistics object on it, but didn't
actually implement it.

Implement tab-completion for statistics objects.  This can stand some
more improvement.

Authors: Alvaro Herrera, with lots of cleanup by Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170420212426.ltvgyhnefvhixm6i@alvherre.pgsql
2017-05-12 14:59:35 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
d496a65790 Standardize "WAL location" terminology
Other previously used terms were "WAL position" or "log position".
2017-05-12 13:51:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c1a7f64b4a Replace "transaction log" with "write-ahead log"
This makes documentation and error messages match the renaming of "xlog"
to "wal" in APIs and file naming.
2017-05-12 11:52:43 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
96e1cb4c0f pg_dump: Add --no-publications option
Author: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-05-12 09:15:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
b807f59828 Rework the options syntax for logical replication commands
For CREATE/ALTER PUBLICATION/SUBSCRIPTION, use similar option style as
other statements that use a WITH clause for options.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-05-12 08:57:49 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
26aa1cf376 pg_dump: Add --no-subscriptions option
Author: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-05-09 10:58:06 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
013c1178fd Remove the NODROP SLOT option from DROP SUBSCRIPTION
It turned out this approach had problems, because a DROP command should
not have any options other than CASCADE and RESTRICT.  Instead, always
attempt to drop the slot if there is one configured, but also add an
ALTER SUBSCRIPTION action to set the slot to NONE.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/29431.1493730652@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-05-09 10:20:42 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
eb61136dc7 Remove support for password_encryption='off' / 'plain'.
Storing passwords in plaintext hasn't been a good idea for a very long
time, if ever. Now seems like a good time to finally forbid it, since we're
messing with this in PostgreSQL 10 anyway.

Remove the CREATE/ALTER USER UNENCRYPTED PASSSWORD 'foo' syntax, since
storing passwords unencrypted is no longer supported. ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
'foo' is still accepted, but ENCRYPTED is now just a noise-word, it does
the same as just PASSWORD 'foo'.

Likewise, remove the --unencrypted option from createuser, but accept
--encrypted as a no-op for backward compatibility. AFAICS, --encrypted was
a no-op even before this patch, because createuser encrypted the password
before sending it to the server even if --encrypted was not specified. It
added the ENCRYPTED keyword to the SQL command, but since the password was
already in encrypted form, it didn't make any difference. The documentation
was not clear on whether that was intended or not, but it's moot now.

Also, while password_encryption='on' is still accepted as an alias for
'md5', it is now marked as hidden, so that it is not listed as an accepted
value in error hints, for example. That's not directly related to removing
'plain', but it seems better this way.

Reviewed by Michael Paquier

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/16e9b768-fd78-0b12-cfc1-7b6b7f238fde@iki.fi
2017-05-08 11:26:07 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
e950024066 doc: Improve order in ALTER PUBLICATION/SUBSCRIPTION ref pages
Move the OWNER and RENAME clauses to the end, so the interesting
functionality is listed first.  This is more typical on nearby reference
pages, whereas the previous order was the order in which the clauses
were added.
2017-05-02 15:31:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a35ac7c4e3 doc: Update ALTER SEQUENCE claims about changes being nontransactional
Clarify that all changes except RESTART are transactional (since
1753b1b027).

Reported-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-05-02 10:34:49 -04:00
Stephen Frost
b9a3ef55b2 Remove unnecessairly duplicated gram.y productions
Declarative partitioning duplicated the TypedTableElement productions,
evidently to remove the need to specify WITH OPTIONS when creating
partitions.  Instead, simply make WITH OPTIONS optional in the
TypedTableElement production and remove all of the duplicate
PartitionElement-related productions.  This change simplifies the
syntax and makes WITH OPTIONS optional when adding defaults, constraints
or storage parameters to columns when creating either typed tables or
partitions.

Also update pg_dump to no longer include WITH OPTIONS, since it's not
necessary, and update the documentation to reflect that WITH OPTIONS is
now optional.
2017-04-27 20:14:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e315346d83 doc: ALTER SUBSCRIPTION documentation fixes
WITH is optional for REFRESH PUBLICATION.  Also, remove a spurious
bracket and fix a punctuation.

Author: Euler Taveira <euler@timbira.com.br>
2017-04-26 12:07:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1d8573ed55 doc: first draft of Postgres 10 release notes 2017-04-24 21:26:33 -04:00
Tom Lane
8bcb31ad5a Sync pg_ctl documentation and usage message with reality.
Commit 05cd12ed5 ("pg_ctl: Change default to wait for all actions")
was a tad sloppy about updating the documentation to match.  The
documentation was also sorely in need of a copy-editing pass, having
been adjusted at different times by different people who took little
care to maintain consistency of style.
2017-04-20 14:41:55 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
594b526bcf Modify message when partitioned table is added to publication
Give a more specific error message than "xyz is not a table".

Also document in CREATE PUBLICATION which kinds of relations are not
supported.

based on patch by Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
2017-04-20 14:18:33 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
b2188575c5 Fix example on creating a trigger with a transition table.
Yugo Nagata

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20170417180921.3047f3b0.nagata@sraoss.co.jp
2017-04-18 11:51:06 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera
8c5cdb7f4f Tighten up relation kind checks for extended statistics
We were accepting creation of extended statistics only for regular
tables, but they can usefully be created for foreign tables, partitioned
tables, and materialized views, too.  Allow those cases.

While at it, make sure all the rejected cases throw a consistent error
message, and add regression tests for the whole thing.

Author: David Rowley, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f-BmGo410bh5RSPZUvOO0LhmHL2NYmdrC_Jm8pk_FfyCA@mail.gmail.com
2017-04-17 17:55:55 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
1fe33252a0 Document that ONLY can be specified in publication commands
Author: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
2017-04-17 09:51:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6e5f9a6dc0 Fix typo in comment 2017-04-14 14:07:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
887227a1cc Add option to modify sync commit per subscription
This also changes default behaviour of subscription workers to
synchronous_commit = off.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-04-14 13:58:46 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a9254e675b pg_dump: Always dump subscriptions NOCONNECT
This removes the pg_dump option --no-subscription-connect and makes it
the default.  Dumping a subscription so that it activates right away
when restored is not very useful, because the state of the publication
server is unclear.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/e4fbfad5-c6ac-fd50-6777-18c84b34eb2f@2ndquadrant.com
2017-04-13 12:01:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c31671f9b5 pg_dump: Dump subscriptions by default
Dump subscriptions if the current user is a superuser, otherwise write a
warning and skip them.  Remove the pg_dump option
--include-subscriptions.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/e4fbfad5-c6ac-fd50-6777-18c84b34eb2f@2ndquadrant.com
2017-04-13 12:01:27 -04:00
Fujii Masao
a6e7d591d0 Improve documentations for ALTER PUBLICATION and ALTER SUBSCRIPTION.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoC32YgtateNqTFXzTJmHHe6hXs4cpJTND3n-Ts8f-aMqw@mail.gmail.com
2017-04-13 11:29:53 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
1e298b8dbb doc: clearify pg_upgrade default copy behavior
Reported-by: Marek <marek.cvoren@gmail.com>

Discussion: 20170328110253.2695.62609@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2017-04-11 12:14:09 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f0e44021df doc: Add some markup 2017-04-07 22:45:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
3217327053 Identity columns
This is the SQL standard-conforming variant of PostgreSQL's serial
columns.  It fixes a few usability issues that serial columns have:

- CREATE TABLE / LIKE copies default but refers to same sequence
- cannot add/drop serialness with ALTER TABLE
- dropping default does not drop sequence
- need to grant separate privileges to sequence
- other slight weirdnesses because serial is some kind of special macro

Reviewed-by: Vitaly Burovoy <vitaly.burovoy@gmail.com>
2017-04-06 08:41:37 -04:00
Simon Riggs
2686ee1b7c Collect and use multi-column dependency stats
Follow on patch in the multi-variate statistics patch series.

CREATE STATISTICS s1 WITH (dependencies) ON (a, b) FROM t;
ANALYZE;
will collect dependency stats on (a, b) and then use the measured
dependency in subsequent query planning.

Commit 7b504eb282 added
CREATE STATISTICS with n-distinct coefficients. These are now
specified using the mutually exclusive option WITH (ndistinct).

Author: Tomas Vondra, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI, Álvaro Herrera, Dean Rasheed, Robert Haas
and many other comments and contributions
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/56f40b20-c464-fad2-ff39-06b668fac47c@2ndquadrant.com
2017-04-05 18:00:42 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
5ebeb579b9 Follow-on cleanup for the transition table patch.
Commit 59702716 added transition table support to PL/pgsql so that
SQL queries in trigger functions could access those transient
tables.  In order to provide the same level of support for PL/perl,
PL/python and PL/tcl, refactor the relevant code into a new
function SPI_register_trigger_data.  Call the new function in the
trigger handler of all four PLs, and document it as a public SPI
function so that authors of out-of-tree PLs can do the same.

Also get rid of a second QueryEnvironment object that was
maintained by PL/pgsql.  That was previously used to deal with
cursors, but the same approach wasn't appropriate for PLs that are
less tangled up with core code.  Instead, have SPI_cursor_open
install the connection's current QueryEnvironment, as already
happens for SPI_execute_plan.

While in the docs, remove the note that transition tables were only
supported in C and PL/pgSQL triggers, and correct some ommissions.

Thomas Munro with some work by Kevin Grittner (mostly docs)
2017-04-04 18:36:39 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
60a0b2ec89 Adjust min/max values when changing sequence type
When changing the type of a sequence, adjust the min/max values of the
sequence if it looks like the previous values were the default values.
Previously, it would leave the old values in place, requiring manual
adjustments even in the usual/default cases.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vitaly Burovoy <vitaly.burovoy@gmail.com>
2017-04-04 12:49:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
ffac5998b4 Doc: clarify behavior of OT_WHOLE_LINE and OT_FILEPIPE psql slash commands.
This is another bit of ancient behavior that was documented poorly (in
a couple of cases) or not at all (in several others).

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9b4ea968-753f-4b5f-b46c-d7d3bf7c8f90@manitou-mail.org
2017-04-02 19:01:53 -04:00
Tom Lane
68dba97a4d Document psql's behavior of recalling the previously executed query.
Various psql slash commands that normally act on the current query buffer
will automatically recall and re-use the most recently executed SQL command
instead, if the current query buffer is empty.  Although this behavior is
ancient (dating apparently to commit 77a472993), it was documented nowhere
in the psql reference page.  For that matter, we'd never bothered to define
the concept of "current query buffer" explicitly.  Fix that.  Do some
wordsmithing on relevant command descriptions to improve clarity and
consistency.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9b4ea968-753f-4b5f-b46c-d7d3bf7c8f90@manitou-mail.org
2017-04-02 18:26:37 -04:00
Tom Lane
f833c847b8 Allow psql variable substitution to occur in backtick command strings.
Previously, text between backquotes in a psql metacommand's arguments
was always passed to the shell literally.  That considerably hobbles
the usefulness of the feature for scripting, so we'd foreseen for a long
time that we'd someday want to allow substitution of psql variables into
the shell command.  IMO the addition of \if metacommands has brought us to
that point, since \if can greatly benefit from some sort of client-side
expression evaluation capability, and psql itself is not going to grow any
such thing in time for v10.  Hence, this patch.  It allows :VARIABLE to be
replaced by the exact contents of the named variable, while :'VARIABLE'
is replaced by the variable's contents suitably quoted to become a single
shell-command argument.  (The quoting rules for that are different from
those for SQL literals, so this is a bit of an abuse of the :'VARIABLE'
notation, but I doubt anyone will be confused.)

As with other situations in psql, no substitution occurs if the word
following a colon is not a known variable name.  That limits the risk of
compatibility problems for existing psql scripts; but the risk isn't zero,
so this needs to be called out in the v10 release notes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9561.1490895211@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-04-01 21:44:54 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
7526e10224 BRIN auto-summarization
Previously, only VACUUM would cause a page range to get initially
summarized by BRIN indexes, which for some use cases takes too much time
since the inserts occur.  To avoid the delay, have brininsert request a
summarization run for the previous range as soon as the first tuple is
inserted into the first page of the next range.  Autovacuum is in charge
of processing these requests, after doing all the regular vacuuming/
analyzing work on tables.

This doesn't impose any new tasks on autovacuum, because autovacuum was
already in charge of doing summarizations.  The only actual effect is to
change the timing, i.e. that it occurs earlier.  For this reason, we
don't go any great lengths to record these requests very robustly; if
they are lost because of a server crash or restart, they will happen at
a later time anyway.

Most of the new code here is in autovacuum, which can now be told about
"work items" to process.  This can be used for other things such as GIN
pending list cleaning, perhaps visibility map bit setting, both of which
are currently invoked during vacuum, but do not really depend on vacuum
taking place.

The requests are at the page range level, a granularity for which we did
not have SQL-level access; we only had index-level summarization
requests via brin_summarize_new_values().  It seems reasonable to add
SQL-level access to range-level summarization too, so add a function
brin_summarize_range() to do that.

Authors: Álvaro Herrera, based on sketch from Simon Riggs.
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170301045823.vneqdqkmsd4as4ds@alvherre.pgsql
2017-04-01 14:00:53 -03:00
Kevin Grittner
5970271632 Add transition table support to plpgsql.
Kevin Grittner and Thomas Munro
Reviewed by Heikki Linnakangas, David Fetter, and Thomas Munro
with valuable comments and suggestions from many others
2017-03-31 23:30:08 -05:00
Tom Lane
64d4da511c For foreign keys, check REFERENCES privilege only on the referenced table.
We were requiring that the user have REFERENCES permission on both the
referenced and referencing tables --- but this doesn't seem to have any
support in the SQL standard, which says only that you need REFERENCES
permission on the referenced table.  And ALTER TABLE ADD FOREIGN KEY has
already checked that you own the referencing table, so the check could
only fail if a table owner has revoked his own REFERENCES permission.
Moreover, the symmetric interpretation of this permission is unintuitive
and confusing, as per complaint from Paul Jungwirth.  So let's drop the
referencing-side check.

In passing, do a bit of wordsmithing on the GRANT reference page so that
all the privilege types are described in similar fashion.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8940.1490906755@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-03-31 18:11:30 -04:00
Robert Haas
c94e6942ce Don't allocate storage for partitioned tables.
Also, don't allow setting reloptions on them, since that would have no
effect given the lack of storage.  The patch does this by introducing
a new reloption kind for which there are currently no reloptions -- we
might have some in the future -- so it adjusts parseRelOptions to
handle that case correctly.

Bumped catversion.  System catalogs that contained reloptions for
partitioned tables are no longer valid; plus, there are now fewer
physical files on disk, which is not technically a catalog change but
still a good reason to re-initdb.

Amit Langote, reviewed by Maksim Milyutin and Kyotaro Horiguchi and
revised a bit by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20170331.173326.212311140.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-31 16:28:51 -04:00
Tom Lane
e984ef5861 Support \if ... \elif ... \else ... \endif in psql scripting.
This patch adds nestable conditional blocks to psql.  The control
structure feature per se is complete, but the boolean expressions
understood by \if and \elif are pretty primitive; basically, after
variable substitution and backtick expansion, the result has to be
"true" or "false" or one of the other standard spellings of a boolean
value.  But that's enough for many purposes, since you can always
do the heavy lifting on the server side; and we can extend it later.

Along the way, pay down some of the technical debt that had built up
around psql/command.c:
* Refactor exec_command() into a function per command, instead of
being a 1500-line monstrosity.  This makes the file noticeably longer
because of repetitive function header/trailer overhead, but it seems
much more readable.
* Teach psql_get_variable() and psqlscanslash.l to suppress variable
substitution and backtick expansion on the basis of the conditional
stack state, thereby allowing removal of the OT_NO_EVAL kluge.
* Fix the no-doubt-once-expedient hack of sometimes silently substituting
mainloop.c's previous_buf for query_buf when calling HandleSlashCmds.
(It's a bit remarkable that commands like \r worked at all with that.)
Recall of a previous query is now done explicitly in the slash commands
where that should happen.

Corey Huinker, reviewed by Fabien Coelho, further hacking by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=c94OSRTnat=LX0ivNq4pxDNeoomFfYvBKM5N_xfmLtAA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-30 12:59:24 -04:00
Fujii Masao
ec19693014 Simplify the example of VACUUM in documentation.
Previously a detailed activity report by VACUUM VERBOSE ANALYZE was
described as an example of VACUUM in docs. But it had been obsolete
for a long time. For example, commit feb4f44d29
updated the content of that activity report in 2003, but we had
forgotten to update the example.

So basically we need to update the example. But since no one cared
about the details of VACUUM output and complained about that mistake
for such long time, per discussion on hackers, we decided to get rid
of the detailed activity report from the example and simplify it.

Back-patch to all supported versions.

Reported by Masahiko Sawada, patch by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAGA2pB3p-CWmTkxBsbkZS1bcDGBLcYVcvcDxspG_XAfA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-31 01:31:15 +09:00
Teodor Sigaev
ab89e465cb Altering default privileges on schemas
Extend ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES command to schemas.

Author: Matheus Oliveira
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelínek, Ashutosh Sharma

https://commitfest.postgresql.org/13/887/
2017-03-28 18:58:55 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
5196f13b27 doc: Fix oldhtml/old PDF build again
Commit e259e1f748 was faulty and created
some broken output.  This one fixes it better.
2017-03-27 11:58:52 -04:00
Robert Haas
d65561464f Improve documentation of how NOT NULL works with partitioning.
Amit Langote

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/a6f99cdb-21e7-1d65-1381-91f2cfa156e2@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-27 11:01:33 -04:00
Robert Haas
4785e377f9 Tidy up the CREATE TABLE documentation for partitioning.
Remove some <note> tags that make this too "loud".  Fix some typos.

Amit Langote, with a few minor corrections by me

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/a6f99cdb-21e7-1d65-1381-91f2cfa156e2@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-27 11:00:09 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e259e1f748 doc: Fix oldhtml/old PDF build
"xref to REFSECT1 unsupported" with the DSSSL stylesheets.

Reported-by: Devrim Gündüz <devrim@gunduz.org>
2017-03-26 15:03:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
87dee41f3e Add COMMENT and SECURITY LABEL support for publications and subscriptions 2017-03-24 23:44:23 -04:00
Fujii Masao
70adf2fbe1 Make VACUUM VERBOSE report the number of skipped frozen pages.
Previously manual VACUUM did not report the number of skipped frozen
pages even when VERBOSE option is specified. But this information is
helpful to monitor the VACUUM activity, and also autovacuum reports that
number in the log file when the condition of log_autovacuum_min_duration
is met.

This commit changes VACUUM VERBOSE so that it reports the number
of frozen pages that it skips.

Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Yugo Nagata and Jim Nasby

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDZQKCxo0L39Mrq08cONNkXQKXuh=2DP1Q8ebmt35SoaA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-25 02:39:44 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
7b504eb282 Implement multivariate n-distinct coefficients
Add support for explicitly declared statistic objects (CREATE
STATISTICS), allowing collection of statistics on more complex
combinations that individual table columns.  Companion commands DROP
STATISTICS and ALTER STATISTICS ... OWNER TO / SET SCHEMA / RENAME are
added too.  All this DDL has been designed so that more statistic types
can be added later on, such as multivariate most-common-values and
multivariate histograms between columns of a single table, leaving room
for permitting columns on multiple tables, too, as well as expressions.

This commit only adds support for collection of n-distinct coefficient
on user-specified sets of columns in a single table.  This is useful to
estimate number of distinct groups in GROUP BY and DISTINCT clauses;
estimation errors there can cause over-allocation of memory in hashed
aggregates, for instance, so it's a worthwhile problem to solve.  A new
special pseudo-type pg_ndistinct is used.

(num-distinct estimation was deemed sufficiently useful by itself that
this is worthwhile even if no further statistic types are added
immediately; so much so that another version of essentially the same
functionality was submitted by Kyotaro Horiguchi:
https://postgr.es/m/20150828.173334.114731693.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp
though this commit does not use that code.)

Author: Tomas Vondra.  Some code rework by Álvaro.
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Jeff Janes,
    Ideriha Takeshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/543AFA15.4080608@fuzzy.cz
    https://postgr.es/m/20170320190220.ixlaueanxegqd5gr@alvherre.pgsql
2017-03-24 14:06:10 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
eccfef81e1 ICU support
Add a column collprovider to pg_collation that determines which library
provides the collation data.  The existing choices are default and libc,
and this adds an icu choice, which uses the ICU4C library.

The pg_locale_t type is changed to a union that contains the
provider-specific locale handles.  Users of locale information are
changed to look into that struct for the appropriate handle to use.

Also add a collversion column that records the version of the collation
when it is created, and check at run time whether it is still the same.
This detects potentially incompatible library upgrades that can corrupt
indexes and other structures.  This is currently only supported by
ICU-provided collations.

initdb initializes the default collation set as before from the `locale
-a` output but also adds all available ICU locales with a "-x-icu"
appended.

Currently, ICU-provided collations can only be explicitly named
collations.  The global database locales are still always libc-provided.

ICU support is enabled by configure --with-icu.

Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson <andreas@proxel.se>
2017-03-23 15:28:48 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
50c956add8 Remove createlang and droplang
They have been deprecated since PostgreSQL 9.1.

Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
2017-03-23 14:16:45 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7c4f52409a Logical replication support for initial data copy
Add functionality for a new subscription to copy the initial data in the
tables and then sync with the ongoing apply process.

For the copying, add a new internal COPY option to have the COPY source
data provided by a callback function.  The initial data copy works on
the subscriber by receiving COPY data from the publisher and then
providing it locally into a COPY that writes to the destination table.

A WAL receiver can now execute full SQL commands.  This is used here to
obtain information about tables and publications.

Several new options were added to CREATE and ALTER SUBSCRIPTION to
control whether and when initial table syncing happens.

Change pg_dump option --no-create-subscription-slots to
--no-subscription-connect and use the new CREATE SUBSCRIPTION
... NOCONNECT option for that.

Author: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Tested-by: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
2017-03-23 08:55:37 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
cbf7ed51b8 doc: Improve CREATE PUBLICATION examples 2017-03-22 15:27:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a2760915b3 doc: Markup and formatting improvements 2017-03-22 15:27:40 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
4cfc9484d4 Refine rules for altering publication owner
Previously, the new owner had to be a superuser.  The new rules are more
refined similar to other objects.

Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-03-22 11:19:30 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
96a7128b7b Sync pg_dump and pg_dumpall output
Before exiting any files are fsync'ed. A --no-sync option is also
provided for a faster exit if desired.

Michael Paquier.

Reviewed by Albe Laurenz

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB7nPqS1uZ=Ov+UruW6jr3vB-S_DLVMPc0dQpV-fTDjmm0ZQMg@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-22 10:20:13 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
010505546a doc: Improve markup 2017-03-21 08:33:46 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
17fa3e834f doc: clarify that function "ownership" that controls permission
It used to say the creation user.

Reported-by: Nathan Wagner
2017-03-20 22:33:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c709b113e8 doc: improve createdb example
The previous example could error out due to encoding mismatches;  use
-T/template instead.

Reported-by: Jason O'Donnell
2017-03-20 21:23:56 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
b6fb534f10 Add IF NOT EXISTS for CREATE SERVER and CREATE USER MAPPING
There is still some inconsistency with the error messages surrounding
foreign servers. Some use the word "foreign" and some don't. My
inclination is to remove all such uses of "foreign" on the basis that
the  CREATE/ALTER/DROP SERVER commands don't use the word. However, that
is left for another day. In this patch I have kept to the existing usage
in the affected commands, which omits "foreign".

Anastasia Lubennikova, reviewed by Arthur Zakirov and Ashtosh Bapat.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/7c2ab9b8-388a-1ce0-23a3-7acf2a0ed3c6@postgrespro.ru
2017-03-20 16:40:45 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5e86bb51ea doc: Update compatibility claim
Update outdated claim that TRUNCATE is a PostgreSQL extension.

Add cross-links between DELETE and TRUNCATE references pages.
2017-03-18 14:25:41 -04:00
Robert Haas
88e66d193f Rename "pg_clog" directory to "pg_xact".
Names containing the letters "log" sometimes confuse users into
believing that only non-critical data is present.  It is hoped
this renaming will discourage ill-considered removals of transaction
status data.

Michael Paquier

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmoa9xFQyjRZupbdEFuwUerFTvC6HjZq1ud6GYragGDFFgA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-17 09:48:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e76db009f0 Add more documentation and tests for publications
Add/correct documentation and add some tests related to how access
control around adding tables to publications works.
2017-03-15 13:52:07 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
aefeb68741 Allow referring to functions without arguments when unique
In DDL commands referring to an existing function, allow omitting the
argument list if the function name is unique in its schema, per SQL
standard.

This uses the same logic that the regproc type uses for finding
functions by name only.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-03-14 23:55:19 -04:00
Robert Haas
c11453ce0a hash: Add write-ahead logging support.
The warning about hash indexes not being write-ahead logged and their
use being discouraged has been removed.  "snapshot too old" is now
supported for tables with hash indexes.  Most importantly, barring
bugs, hash indexes will now be crash-safe and usable on standbys.

This commit doesn't yet add WAL consistency checking for hash
indexes, as we now have for other index types; a separate patch has
been submitted to cure that lack.

Amit Kapila, reviewed and slightly modified by me.  The larger patch
series of which this is a part has been reviewed and tested by Álvaro
Herrera, Ashutosh Sharma, Mark Kirkwood, Jeff Janes, and Jesper
Pedersen.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1JOBX=YU33631Qh-XivYXtPSALh514+jR8XeD7v+K3r_Q@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-14 13:27:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a47b38c9ee Spelling fixes
From: Josh Soref <jsoref@gmail.com>
2017-03-14 12:58:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
37289ffdbf doc: Fix synopsis 2017-03-14 11:19:12 -04:00
Robert Haas
b54aad8e34 Document lack of validation when attaching foreign partitions.
Ashutosh Bapat, revised a bit by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFjFpRdLaCa-1wJase0=YWG5o3cJnbuUt_vrqm2TDBKM_vQ_oA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-09 13:13:15 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
be37c2120a Enable replication connections by default in pg_hba.conf
initdb now initializes a pg_hba.conf that allows replication connections
from the local host, same as it does for regular connections.  The
connecting user still needs to have the REPLICATION attribute or be a
superuser.

The intent is to allow pg_basebackup from the local host to succeed
without requiring additional configuration.

Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com> and me
2017-03-09 08:39:44 -05:00
Stephen Frost
f9b1a0dd40 Expose explain's SUMMARY option
This exposes the existing explain summary option to users to allow them
to choose if they wish to have the planning time and totalled run time
included in the EXPLAIN result.  The existing default behavior is
retained if SUMMARY is not specified- running explain without analyze
will not print the summary lines (just the planning time, currently)
while running explain with analyze will include the summary lines (both
the planning time and the totalled execution time).

Users who wish to see the summary information for plain explain can now
use: EXPLAIN (SUMMARY ON) query;  Users who do not want to have the
summary printed for an analyze run can use:
EXPLAIN (ANALYZE ON, SUMMARY OFF) query;

With this, we can now also have EXPLAIN ANALYZE queries included in our
regression tests by using:
EXPLAIN (ANALYZE ON, TIMING OFF, SUMMARY off) query;

I went ahead and added an example of this, which will hopefully not make
the buildfarm complain.

Author: Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFjFpReE5z2h98U2Vuia8hcEkpRRwrauRjHmyE44hNv8-xk+XA@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-08 15:14:03 -05:00
Robert Haas
508dabaf39 Remove duplicated word.
Amit Langote
2017-03-07 11:18:56 -05:00
Stephen Frost
b2678efd43 psql: Add \gx command
It can often be useful to use expanded mode output (\x) for just a
single query.  Introduce a \gx which acts exactly like \g except that it
will force expanded output mode for that one \gx call.  This is simpler
than having to use \x as a toggle and also means that the user doesn't
have to worry about the current state of the expanded variable, or
resetting it later, to ensure a given query is always returned in
expanded mode.

Primairly Christoph's patch, though I did tweak the documentation and help
text a bit, and re-indented the tab completion section.

Author: Christoph Berg
Reviewed By: Daniel Verite
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170127132737.6skslelaf4txs6iw%40msg.credativ.de
2017-03-07 09:31:52 -05:00
Simon Riggs
9a83d56b38 Allow pg_dumpall to dump roles w/o user passwords
Add new option --no-role-passwords which dumps roles without passwords.
Since we don’t need passwords, we choose to use pg_roles in preference
to pg_authid since access may be restricted for security reasons in
some configrations.

Robins Tharakan and Simon Riggs
2017-03-07 22:00:54 +08:00
Heikki Linnakangas
818fd4a67d Support SCRAM-SHA-256 authentication (RFC 5802 and 7677).
This introduces a new generic SASL authentication method, similar to the
GSS and SSPI methods. The server first tells the client which SASL
authentication mechanism to use, and then the mechanism-specific SASL
messages are exchanged in AuthenticationSASLcontinue and PasswordMessage
messages. Only SCRAM-SHA-256 is supported at the moment, but this allows
adding more SASL mechanisms in the future, without changing the overall
protocol.

Support for channel binding, aka SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS is left for later.

The SASLPrep algorithm, for pre-processing the password, is not yet
implemented. That could cause trouble, if you use a password with
non-ASCII characters, and a client library that does implement SASLprep.
That will hopefully be added later.

Authorization identities, as specified in the SCRAM-SHA-256 specification,
are ignored. SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION provides more or less the same
functionality, anyway.

If a user doesn't exist, perform a "mock" authentication, by constructing
an authentic-looking challenge on the fly. The challenge is derived from
a new system-wide random value, "mock authentication nonce", which is
created at initdb, and stored in the control file. We go through these
motions, in order to not give away the information on whether the user
exists, to unauthenticated users.

Bumps PG_CONTROL_VERSION, because of the new field in control file.

Patch by Michael Paquier and Heikki Linnakangas, reviewed at different
stages by Robert Haas, Stephen Frost, David Steele, Aleksander Alekseev,
and many others.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqRbR3GmFYdedCAhzukfKrgBLTLtMvENOmPrVWREsZkF8g%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqSMXU35g%3DW9X74HVeQp0uvgJxvYOuA4A-A3M%2B0wfEBv-w%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/55192AFE.6080106@iki.fi
2017-03-07 14:25:40 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
e6477a8134 Combine several DROP variants into generic DropStmt
Combine DROP of FOREIGN DATA WRAPPER, SERVER, POLICY, RULE, and TRIGGER
into generic DropStmt grammar.

Reviewed-by: Jim Nasby <Jim.Nasby@BlueTreble.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-03-06 13:31:47 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
583f6c4148 Allow dropping multiple functions at once
The generic drop support already supported dropping multiple objects of
the same kind at once.  But the previous representation
of function signatures across two grammar symbols and structure members
made this cumbersome to do for functions, so it was not supported.  Now
that function signatures are represented by a single structure, it's
trivial to add this support.  Same for aggregates and operators.

Reviewed-by: Jim Nasby <Jim.Nasby@BlueTreble.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-03-06 13:31:47 -05:00
Simon Riggs
6f3a13ff05 Enhance docs for ALTER TABLE lock levels of storage parms
As requested by Robert Haas
2017-03-06 16:48:12 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
272adf4f9c Disallow CREATE/DROP SUBSCRIPTION in transaction block
Disallow CREATE SUBSCRIPTION and DROP SUBSCRIPTION in a transaction
block when the replication slot is to be created or dropped, since that
cannot be rolled back.

based on patch by Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
2017-03-03 23:29:13 -05:00
Robert Haas
3c3bb99330 Don't uselessly rewrite, truncate, VACUUM, or ANALYZE partitioned tables.
Also, recursively perform VACUUM and ANALYZE on partitions when the
command is applied to a partitioned table.  In passing, some related
documentation updates.

Amit Langote, reviewed by Michael Paquier, Ashutosh Bapat, and by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/47288cf1-f72c-dfc2-5ff0-4af962ae5c1b@lab.ntt.co.jp
2017-03-02 17:23:44 +05:30
Magnus Hagander
51e26c9c3d Clarify the role of checkpoint at the begininng of base backups
Output a message about checkpoint starting in verbose mode of
pg_basebackup, and make the documentation state more clearly that this
happens.

Author: Michael Banck
2017-02-26 21:31:54 +01:00
Bruce Momjian
5639ceddcb pg_upgrade docs: clarify instructions on standby extensions
Previously the pg_upgrade standby upgrade instructions said not to
execute pgcrypto.sql, but it should have referenced the extension
command "CREATE EXTENSION pgcrypto".  This patch makes that doc change.

Reported-by: a private bug report

Backpatch-through: 9.4, where standby instructions were added
2017-02-25 12:59:23 -05:00
Robert Haas
a3dc8e495b Make partitions automatically inherit OIDs.
Previously, if the parent was specified as WITH OIDS, each child
also had to be explicitly specified as WITH OIDS.

Amit Langote, per a report from Simon Riggs.  Some additional
work on the documentation changes by me.

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jJBpWocfKrbJcaf3iBt9E3U=WPE_NC8YE6rye+YJ1sYnQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-02-19 21:29:27 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
68f3dbc552 doc: Fix typos
From: Thom Brown <thom@linux.com>
2017-02-17 18:59:29 -05:00
Tom Lane
2b18743614 Doc: fix syntax synopsis for INSERT ... ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE.
Commit 906bfcad7 adjusted the syntax synopsis for UPDATE, but missed
the fact that the INSERT synopsis now contains a duplicate of that.

In passing, improve wording and markup about using a table alias to
dodge the conflict with use of "excluded" as a special table name.
2017-02-15 15:41:09 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
6d16ecc646 Add CREATE COLLATION IF NOT EXISTS clause
The core of the functionality was already implemented when
pg_import_system_collations was added.  This just exposes it as an
option in the SQL command.
2017-02-15 10:01:28 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
2ea5b06c7a Add CREATE SEQUENCE AS <data type> clause
This stores a data type, required to be an integer type, with the
sequence.  The sequences min and max values default to the range
supported by the type, and they cannot be set to values exceeding that
range.  The internal implementation of the sequence is not affected.

Change the serial types to create sequences of the appropriate type.
This makes sure that the min and max values of the sequence for a serial
column match the range of values supported by the table column.  So the
sequence can no longer overflow the table column.

This also makes monitoring for sequence exhaustion/wraparound easier,
which currently requires various contortions to cross-reference the
sequences with the table columns they are used with.

This commit also effectively reverts the pg_sequence column reordering
in f3b421da5f, because the new seqtypid
column allows us to fill the hole in the struct and create a more
natural overall column ordering.

Reviewed-by: Steve Singer <steve@ssinger.info>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-02-10 15:34:35 -05:00
Simon Riggs
c1369fe2ea Improve CREATE TABLE documentation of partitioning
Amit Langote, with corrections by me
2017-02-10 08:59:37 +00:00
Robert Haas
62e8b38751 Rename command line options for ongoing xlog -> wal conversion.
initdb and pg_basebackup now have a --waldir option rather --xlogdir,
and pg_basebackup now has --wal-method rather than --xlog-method.
2017-02-09 16:42:51 -05:00
Robert Haas
85c11324ca Rename user-facing tools with "xlog" in the name to say "wal".
This means pg_receivexlog because pg_receivewal, pg_resetxlog
becomes pg_resetwal, and pg_xlogdump becomes pg_waldump.
2017-02-09 16:23:46 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
e35bbea7dd doc: Some improvements in CREATE SUBSCRIPTION ref page
Add link to description of libpq connection strings.  Add link to
explanation of replication access control.  This currently points to the
description of streaming replication access control, which is currently
the same as for logical replication, but that might be refined later.
Also remove plain-text passwords from the examples, to not encourage
that dubious practice.

based on suggestions from Simon Riggs
2017-02-07 21:26:50 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
549f74733f doc: Update CREATE DATABASE examples
The example of using CREATE DATABASE with the ENCODING option did not
work anymore (except in special circumstances) and did not represent a
good general-purpose example, so write some new examples.

Reported-by: marc+pgsql@milestonerdl.com
2017-02-06 11:55:39 -05:00
Tom Lane
fd6cd69803 Clean up psql's behavior for a few more control variables.
Modify FETCH_COUNT to always have a defined value, like other control
variables, mainly so it will always appear in "\set" output.

Add hooks to force HISTSIZE to be defined and require it to have an
integer value.  (I don't see any point in allowing it to be set to
non-integral values.)

Add hooks to force IGNOREEOF to be defined and require it to have an
integer value.  Unlike the other cases, here we're trying to be
bug-compatible with a rather bogus externally-defined behavior, so I think
we need to continue to allow "\set IGNOREEOF whatever".  Fix it so that
the substitution hook silently replace non-numeric values with "10",
so that the stored value always reflects what we're really doing.

Add a dummy assign hook for HISTFILE, just so it's always in
variables.c's list.  We can't require it to be defined always, because
that would break the interaction with the PSQL_HISTORY environment
variable, so there isn't any change in visible behavior here.

Remove tab-complete.c's private list of known variable names, since that's
really a maintenance nuisance.  Given the preceding changes, there are no
control variables it won't show anyway.  This does mean that if for some
reason you've unset one of the status variables (DBNAME, HOST, etc), that
variable would not appear in tab completion for \set.  But I think that's
fine, for at least two reasons: we shouldn't be encouraging people to use
those variables as regular variables, and if someone does do so anyway,
why shouldn't it act just like a regular variable?

Remove ugly and no-longer-used-anywhere GetVariableNum().  In general,
future additions of integer-valued control variables should follow the
paradigm of adding an assign hook using ParseVariableNum(), so there's
no reason to expect we'd need this again later.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17516.1485973973@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-02-02 20:16:17 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
f1169ab501 Don't count background workers against a user's connection limit.
Doing so doesn't seem to be within the purpose of the per user
connection limits, and has particularly unfortunate effects in
conjunction with parallel queries.

Backpatch to 9.6 where parallel queries were introduced.

David Rowley, reviewed by Robert Haas and Albe Laurenz.
2017-02-01 18:02:43 -05:00
Tom Lane
86322dc7e0 Improve psql's behavior for \set and \unset of its control variables.
This commit improves on the results of commit 511ae628f in two ways:

1. It restores the historical behavior that "\set FOO" is interpreted
as setting FOO to "on", if FOO is a boolean control variable.  We
already found one test script that was expecting that behavior, and
the psql documentation certainly does nothing to discourage people
from assuming that would work, since it often says just "if FOO is set"
when describing the effects of a boolean variable.  However, now this
case will result in actually setting FOO to "on", not an empty string.

2. It arranges for an "\unset" of a control variable to set the value
back to its default value, rather than becoming apparently undefined.
The control variables are also initialized that way at psql startup.

In combination, these things guarantee that a control variable always
has a displayable value that reflects what psql is actually doing.
That is a pretty substantial usability improvement.

The implementation involves adding a second type of variable hook function
that is able to replace a proposed new value (including NULL) with another
one.  We could alternatively have complicated the API of the assign hook,
but this way seems better since many variables can share the same
substitution hook function.

Also document the actual behavior of these variables more fully,
including covering assorted behaviors that were there before but
never documented.

This patch also includes some minor cleanup that should have been in
511ae628f but was missed.

Patch by me, but it owes a lot to discussions with Daniel Vérité.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9572.1485821620@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-02-01 11:02:40 -05:00
Tom Lane
511ae628f3 Make psql reject attempts to set special variables to invalid values.
Previously, if the user set a special variable such as ECHO to an
unrecognized value, psql would bleat but store the new value anyway, and
then fall back to a default setting for the behavior controlled by the
variable.  This was agreed to be a not particularly good idea.  With
this patch, invalid values result in an error message and no change in
state.

(But this applies only to variables that affect psql's behavior; purely
informational variables such as ENCODING can still be set to random
values.)

To do this, modify the API for psql's assign-hook functions so that they
can return an OK/not OK result, and give them the responsibility for
printing error messages when they reject a value.  Adjust the APIs for
ParseVariableBool and ParseVariableNum to support the new behavior
conveniently.

In passing, document the variable VERSION, which had somehow escaped that.
And improve the quite-inadequate commenting in psql/variables.c.

Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Rahila Syed, some further tweaking by me

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7356e741-fa59-4146-a8eb-cf95fd6b21fb@mm
2017-01-30 16:37:26 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
cdcad6b788 doc: Update privileges documentation
The CREATE privilege on databases now also enables creating
publications.
2017-01-26 15:36:59 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
87ecf2d14f doc: Fix typo 2017-01-25 09:28:57 -05:00
Tom Lane
d8d32d9a56 Make UNKNOWN into an actual pseudo-type.
Previously, type "unknown" was labeled as a base type in pg_type, which
perhaps had some sense to it because you were allowed to create tables with
unknown-type columns.  But now that we don't allow that, it makes more
sense to label it a pseudo-type.  This has the additional effects of
forbidding use of "unknown" as a domain base type, cast source or target
type, PL function argument or result type, or plpgsql local variable type;
all of which seem like good holes to plug.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28uwwbL9HUM-WR=hromW1Cvamkn7O-g8fPY2m=_7muJ0oA@mail.gmail.com
2017-01-25 09:27:09 -05:00
Tom Lane
1e7c4bb004 Change unknown-type literals to type text in SELECT and RETURNING lists.
Previously, we left such literals alone if the query or subquery had
no properties forcing a type decision to be made (such as an ORDER BY or
DISTINCT clause using that output column).  This meant that "unknown" could
be an exposed output column type, which has never been a great idea because
it could result in strange failures later on.  For example, an outer query
that tried to do any operations on an unknown-type subquery output would
generally fail with some weird error like "failed to find conversion
function from unknown to text" or "could not determine which collation to
use for string comparison".  Also, if the case occurred in a CREATE VIEW's
query then the view would have an unknown-type column, causing similar
failures in queries trying to use the view.

To fix, at the tail end of parse analysis of a query, forcibly convert any
remaining "unknown" literals in its SELECT or RETURNING list to type text.
However, provide a switch to suppress that, and use it in the cases of
SELECT inside a set operation or INSERT command.  In those cases we already
had type resolution rules that make use of context information from outside
the subquery proper, and we don't want to change that behavior.

Also, change creation of an unknown-type column in a relation from a
warning to a hard error.  The error should be unreachable now in CREATE
VIEW or CREATE MATVIEW, but it's still possible to explicitly say "unknown"
in CREATE TABLE or CREATE (composite) TYPE.  We want to forbid that because
it's nothing but a foot-gun.

This change creates a pg_upgrade failure case: a matview that contains an
unknown-type column can't be pg_upgraded, because reparsing the matview's
defining query will now decide that the column is of type text, which
doesn't match the cstring-like storage that the old materialized column
would actually have.  Add a checking pass to detect that.  While at it,
we can detect tables or composite types that would fail, essentially
for free.  Those would fail safely anyway later on, but we might as
well fail earlier.

This patch is by me, but it owes something to previous investigations
by Rahila Syed.  Also thanks to Ashutosh Bapat and Michael Paquier for
review.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28uwwbL9HUM-WR=hromW1Cvamkn7O-g8fPY2m=_7muJ0oA@mail.gmail.com
2017-01-25 09:17:24 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
123f03ba2c doc: Update ALTER SEQUENCE documentation to match
Update documentation to match change in
0bc1207aeb.
2017-01-25 08:59:24 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
0bc1207aeb Fix default minimum value for descending sequences
For some reason that is lost in history, a descending sequence would
default its minimum value to -2^63+1 (-PG_INT64_MAX) instead of
-2^63 (PG_INT64_MIN), even though explicitly specifying a minimum value
of -2^63 would work.  Fix this inconsistency by using the full range by
default.

Reported-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2017-01-23 14:00:58 -05:00
Tom Lane
cdc2a70470 Allow backslash line continuations in pgbench's meta commands.
A pgbench meta command can now be continued onto additional line(s) of a
script file by writing backslash-return.  The continuation marker is
equivalent to white space in that it separates tokens.

Eventually it'd be nice to have the same thing in psql, but that will
be a much larger project.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Rafia Sabih

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1610031049310.19411@lancre
2017-01-20 11:10:22 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
665d1fad99 Logical replication
- Add PUBLICATION catalogs and DDL
- Add SUBSCRIPTION catalog and DDL
- Define logical replication protocol and output plugin
- Add logical replication workers

From: Petr Jelinek <petr@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Steve Singer <steve@ssinger.info>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
2017-01-20 09:04:49 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
cada1af31d Add compression support to pg_receivexlog
Author: Michael Paquier, review and small changes by me
2017-01-17 12:10:26 +01:00
Magnus Hagander
e7b020f786 Make pg_basebackup use temporary replication slots
Temporary replication slots will be used by default when wal streaming
is used and no slot name is specified with -S. If a slot name is
specified, then a permanent slot with that name is used. If --no-slot is
specified, then no permanent or temporary slot will be used.

Temporary slots are only used on 10.0 and newer, of course.
2017-01-16 13:56:43 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
05cd12ed5b pg_ctl: Change default to wait for all actions
The different actions in pg_ctl had different defaults for -w and -W,
mostly for historical reasons.  Most users will want the -w behavior, so
make that the default.

Remove the -w option in most example and test code, so avoid confusion
and reduce verbosity.  pg_upgrade is not touched, so it can continue to
work with older installations.

Reviewed-by: Beena Emerson <memissemerson@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ryan Murphy <ryanfmurphy@gmail.com>
2017-01-14 09:15:08 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
e574f15d62 Updates to reflect that pg_ctl stop -m fast is the default
Various example and test code used -m fast explicitly, but since it's
the default, this can be omitted now or should be replaced by a better
example.

pg_upgrade is not touched, so it can continue to operate with older
installations.
2017-01-13 21:25:36 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
73f8d73313 pg_xlogdump: document --path behavior
The previous --path documentation and --help output were wrong in both
its meaning and the defaults.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier

Backpatch-through: 9.6
2017-01-10 22:38:14 -05:00
Simon Riggs
7c030783a5 Add pg_recvlogical —-endpos=LSN
Allow pg_recvlogical to specify an ending LSN, complementing
the existing -—startpos=LSN option.

Craig Ringer, reviewed by Euler Taveira and Naoki Okano
2017-01-04 19:02:07 +00:00
Magnus Hagander
9a4d51077c Make wal streaming the default mode for pg_basebackup
Since streaming is now supported for all output formats, make this the
default as this is what most people want.

To get the old behavior, the parameter -X none can be specified to turn
it off.

This also removes the parameter -x for fetch, now requiring -X fetch to
be specified to use that.

Reviewed by Vladimir Rusinov, Michael Paquier and Simon Riggs
2017-01-04 10:40:38 +01:00
Heikki Linnakangas
31c54096a1 Remove bogus notice that older clients might not work with MD5 passwords.
That was written when we still had "crypt" authentication, and it was
referring to the fact that an older client might support "crypt"
authentication but not "md5". But we haven't supported "crypt" for years.
(As soon as we add a new authentication mechanism that doesn't work with
MD5 hashes, we'll need a similar notice again. But this text as it's worded
now is just wrong.)

Backpatch to all supported versions.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/9a7263eb-0980-2072-4424-440bb2513dc7@iki.fi
2017-01-03 14:09:01 +02:00
Tom Lane
67a875355e In pgbench logging, avoid assuming that instr_times match Unix timestamps.
For aggregated logging, pg_bench supposed that printing the integer part of
INSTR_TIME_GET_DOUBLE() would produce a Unix timestamp.  That was already
broken on Windows, and it's about to get broken on most other platforms as
well.  As in commit 74baa1e3b, we can remove the entanglement at the price
of one extra syscall per transaction; though here it seems more convenient
to use time(NULL) instead of gettimeofday(), since we only need
integral-second precision.

I took the time to do some wordsmithing on the documentation about
pgbench's logging features, too.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8837.1483216839@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-01-02 12:26:03 -05:00
Tom Lane
ff33d1456e Spellcheck: s/descendent/descendant/g
I got a little annoyed by reading documentation paragraphs containing
both spellings within a few lines of each other.  My dictionary says
"descendant" is the preferred spelling, and it's certainly the majority
usage in our tree, so standardize on that.

For one usage in parallel.sgml, I thought it better to rewrite to avoid
the term altogether.
2016-12-23 11:53:35 -05:00
Joe Conway
0a85c10225 Improve RLS documentation with respect to COPY
Documentation for pg_restore said COPY TO does not support row security
when in fact it should say COPY FROM. Fix that.

While at it, make it clear that "COPY FROM" does not allow RLS to be
enabled and INSERT should be used instead. Also that SELECT policies
will apply to COPY TO statements.

Back-patch to 9.5 where RLS first appeared.

Author: Joe Conway
Reviewed-By: Dean Rasheed and Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5744FA24.3030008%40joeconway.com
2016-12-22 17:56:50 -08:00
Michael Meskes
4032ef18d0 Fix buffer overflow on particularly named files and clarify documentation about
output file naming.

Patch by Tsunakawa, Takayuki <tsunakawa.takay@jp.fujitsu.com>
2016-12-22 08:28:13 +01:00
Stephen Frost
2d1018ca56 Improve ALTER TABLE documentation
The ALTER TABLE documentation wasn't terribly clear when it came to
which commands could be combined together and what it meant when they
were.

In particular, SET TABLESPACE *can* be combined with other commands,
when it's operating against a single table, but not when multiple tables
are being moved with ALL IN TABLESPACE.  Further, the actions are
applied together but not really in 'parallel', at least today.

Pointed out by: Amit Langote

Improved wording from Tom.

Back-patch to 9.4, where the ALL IN TABLESPACE option was added.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/14c535b4-13ef-0590-1b98-76af355a0763%40lab.ntt.co.jp
2016-12-21 15:03:32 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
b645a05fc6 doc: Remove some trailing whitespace
Per discussion, we will not at this time remove trailing whitespace in
psql output displays where it is part of the actual psql output.

From: Vladimir Rusinov <vrusinov@google.com>
2016-12-17 09:35:31 -05:00
Fujii Masao
4e344c2cf4 Add missing documentation for effective_io_concurrency tablespace option.
The description of effective_io_concurrency option was missing in ALTER
TABLESPACE docs though it's included in CREATE TABLESPACE one.

Back-patch to 9.6 where effective_io_concurrency tablespace option was added.

Michael Paquier, reported by Marc-Olaf Jaschke
2016-12-17 01:25:29 +09:00
Robert Haas
a1a4459c29 doc: Improve documentation related to table partitioning feature.
Commit f0e44751d7 implemented table
partitioning, but failed to mention the "no row movement"
restriction in the documentation.  Fix that and a few other issues.

Amit Langote, with some additional wordsmithing by me.
2016-12-13 08:18:00 -05:00
Robert Haas
f0e44751d7 Implement table partitioning.
Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the
existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences.
The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may
not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no
sense for a relation with no data of its own.  The children are called
partitions and contain all of the actual data.  Each partition has an
implicit partitioning constraint.  Multiple inheritance is not
allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed.  Partitions
can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent
does.  Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the
correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed.
Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign
tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries.

Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned.  List
partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can
involve multiple columns.  A partitioning "column" can be an
expression.

Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it
is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of
partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation
for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner
optimizations.  The tuple routing based which this patch does based on
the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it
seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible.

Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat,
Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova,
Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others.  Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 13:17:55 -05:00
Tom Lane
18f8f784cb Handle empty or all-blank PAGER setting more sanely in psql.
If the PAGER environment variable is set but contains an empty string,
psql would pass it to "sh" which would silently exit, causing whatever
query output we were printing to vanish entirely.  This is quite
mystifying; it took a long time for us to figure out that this was the
cause of Joseph Brenner's trouble report.  Rather than allowing that
to happen, we should treat this as another way to specify "no pager".
(We could alternatively treat it as selecting the default pager, but
it seems more likely that the former is what the user meant to achieve
by setting PAGER this way.)

Nonempty, but all-white-space, PAGER values have the same behavior, and
it's pretty easy to test for that, so let's handle that case the same way.

Most other cases of faulty PAGER values will result in the shell printing
some kind of complaint to stderr, which should be enough to diagnose the
problem, so we don't need to work harder than this.  (Note that there's
been an intentional decision not to be very chatty about apparent failure
returns from the pager process, since that may happen if, eg, the user
quits the pager with control-C or some such.  I'd just as soon not start
splitting hairs about which exit codes might merit making our own report.)

libpq's old PQprint() function was already on board with ignoring empty
PAGER values, but for consistency, make it ignore all-white-space values
as well.

It's been like this a long time, so back-patch to all supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFfgvXWLOE2novHzYjmQK8-J6TmHz42G8f3X0SORM44+stUGmw@mail.gmail.com
2016-12-07 12:19:56 -05:00
Stephen Frost
093129c9d9 Add support for restrictive RLS policies
We have had support for restrictive RLS policies since 9.5, but they
were only available through extensions which use the appropriate hooks.
This adds support into the grammer, catalog, psql and pg_dump for
restrictive RLS policies, thus reducing the cases where an extension is
necessary.

In passing, also move away from using "AND"d and "OR"d in comments.
As pointed out by Alvaro, it's not really appropriate to attempt
to make verbs out of "AND" and "OR", so reword those comments which
attempted to.

Reviewed By: Jeevan Chalke, Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20160901063404.GY4028@tamriel.snowman.net
2016-12-05 15:50:55 -05:00
Stephen Frost
4fafa579b0 Add --no-blobs option to pg_dump
Add an option to exclude blobs when running pg_dump.  By default, blobs
are included but this option can be used to exclude them while keeping
the rest of the dump.

Commment updates and regression tests from me.

Author: Guillaume Lelarge
Reviewed-by: Amul Sul
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/VisenaEmail.48.49926ea6f91dceb6.15355a48249@tc7-visena
2016-11-29 11:09:35 -05:00
Stephen Frost
b57c8333b5 Clarify pg_dump -b documentation
The documentation around the -b/--blobs option to pg_dump seemed to
imply that it might be possible to add blobs to a "schema-only" dump or
similar.  Clarify that blobs are data and therefore will only be
included in dumps where data is being included, even when -b is used to
request blobs be included.

The -b option has been around since before 9.2, so back-patch to all
supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20161119173316.GA13284@tamriel.snowman.net
2016-11-29 10:35:04 -05:00
Stephen Frost
489a51af12 Correct psql documentation example
An example in the psql documentation had an incorrect field name from
what the command actually produced.

Pointed out by Fabien COELHO

Back-patch to 9.6 where the example was added.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1611291349400.19314@lancre
2016-11-29 09:03:11 -05:00
Tom Lane
906bfcad7b Improve handling of "UPDATE ... SET (column_list) = row_constructor".
Previously, the right-hand side of a multiple-column assignment, if it
wasn't a sub-SELECT, had to be a simple parenthesized expression list,
because gram.y was responsible for "bursting" the construct into
independent column assignments.  This had the minor defect that you
couldn't write ROW (though you should be able to, since the standard says
this is a row constructor), and the rather larger defect that unlike other
uses of row constructors, we would not expand a "foo.*" item into multiple
columns.

Fix that by changing the RHS to be just "a_expr" in the grammar, leaving
it to transformMultiAssignRef to separate the elements of a RowExpr;
which it will do only after performing standard transformation of the
RowExpr, so that "foo.*" behaves as expected.

The key reason we didn't do that before was the hard-wired handling of
DEFAULT tokens (SetToDefault nodes).  This patch deals with that issue by
allowing DEFAULT in any a_expr and having parse analysis throw an error
if SetToDefault is found in an unexpected place.  That's an improvement
anyway since the error can be more specific than just "syntax error".

The SQL standard suggests that the RHS could be any a_expr yielding a
suitable row value.  This patch doesn't really move the goal posts in that
respect --- you're still limited to RowExpr or a sub-SELECT --- but it does
fix the grammar restriction, so it provides some tangible progress towards
a full implementation.  And the limitation is now documented by an explicit
error message rather than an unhelpful "syntax error".

Discussion: <8542.1479742008@sss.pgh.pa.us>
2016-11-22 15:20:10 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
8ce4f597ab Fix duplication in ALTER MATERIALIZE VIEW synopsis
Commit 3c4cf08087 should have removed SET TABLESPACE from the synopsis
of ALTER MATERIALIZE VIEW as a possible "action" when it added a
separate line for it in the main command listing, but failed to.
Repair.

Backpatch to 9.4, like the aforementioned commit.
2016-11-14 11:14:34 -03:00
Tom Lane
279c439c7f Support "COPY view FROM" for views with INSTEAD OF INSERT triggers.
We just pass the data to the INSTEAD trigger.

Haribabu Kommi, reviewed by Dilip Kumar

Patch: <CAJrrPGcSQkrNkO+4PhLm4B8UQQQmU9YVUuqmtgM=pmzMfxWaWQ@mail.gmail.com>
2016-11-10 14:13:43 -05:00
Robert Haas
41124a91e6 pgbench: Allow the transaction log file prefix to be changed.
Masahiko Sawada, reviewed by Fabien Coelho and Beena Emerson, with
some a bit of wordsmithing and cosmetic adjustment by me.
2016-11-09 16:28:43 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
36ac6d0e79 Fix typo 2016-11-08 18:37:40 +01:00
Kevin Grittner
8c48375e5f Implement syntax for transition tables in AFTER triggers.
This is infrastructure for the complete SQL standard feature.  No
support is included at this point for execution nodes or PLs.  The
intent is to add that soon.

As this patch leaves things, standard syntax can create tuplestores
to contain old and/or new versions of rows affected by a statement.
References to these tuplestores are in the TriggerData structure.
C triggers can access the tuplestores directly, so they are usable,
but they cannot yet be referenced within a SQL statement.
2016-11-04 10:49:50 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
59fa9d2d9d pg_test_timing: Add NLS
Also straighten out use of time unit abbreviations a bit.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2016-11-04 10:40:05 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a0f357e570 psql: Split up "Modifiers" column in \d and \dD
Make separate columns "Collation", "Nullable", "Default".

Reviewed-by: Kuntal Ghosh <kuntalghosh.2007@gmail.com>
2016-11-03 14:02:46 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
56c7d8d455 Allow pg_basebackup to stream transaction log in tar mode
This will write the received transaction log into a file called
pg_wal.tar(.gz) next to the other tarfiles instead of writing it to
base.tar. When using fetch mode, the transaction log is still written to
base.tar like before, and when used against a pre-10 server, the file
is named pg_xlog.tar.

To do this, implement a new concept of a "walmethod", which is
responsible for writing the WAL. Two implementations exist, one that
writes to a plain directory (which is also used by pg_receivexlog) and
one that writes to a tar file with optional compression.

Reviewed by Michael Paquier
2016-10-23 15:23:11 +02:00
Robert Haas
f82ec32ac3 Rename "pg_xlog" directory to "pg_wal".
"xlog" is not a particularly clear abbreviation for "write-ahead log",
and it sometimes confuses users into believe that the contents of the
"pg_xlog" directory are not critical data, leading to unpleasant
consequences.  So, rename the directory to "pg_wal".

This patch modifies pg_upgrade and pg_basebackup to understand both
the old and new directory layouts; the former is necessary given the
purpose of the tool, while the latter merely avoids an unnecessary
backward-compatibility break.

We may wish to consider renaming other programs, switches, and
functions which still use the old "xlog" naming to also refer to
"wal".  However, that's still under discussion, so let's do just this
much for now.

Discussion: CAB7nPqTeC-8+zux8_-4ZD46V7YPwooeFxgndfsq5Rg8ibLVm1A@mail.gmail.com

Michael Paquier
2016-10-20 11:32:18 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
9ffe4a8b4c Make getrusage() output a little more readable
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@heroku.com>
2016-10-19 09:53:16 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5d58c07a44 initdb pg_basebackup: Rename --noxxx options to --no-xxx
--noclean and --nosync were the only options spelled without a hyphen,
so change this for consistency with other options.  The options in
pg_basebackup have not been in a release, so we just rename them.  For
initdb, we retain the old variants.

Vik Fearing and me
2016-10-19 08:48:48 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
caf936b09f pg_ctl: Add long option for -o
Now all normally used options are covered by long options as well.
2016-10-19 08:48:48 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c709c60740 doc: Consistently use = sign in long options synopses
This was already the predominant form in man pages and help output.
2016-10-19 08:48:48 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0be22457d7 pg_ctl: Add long options for -w and -W
From: Vik Fearing <vik@2ndquadrant.fr>
2016-10-19 08:48:22 -04:00
Tom Lane
64f3524e2c Remove pg_dump/pg_dumpall support for dumping from pre-8.0 servers.
The need for dumping from such ancient servers has decreased to about nil
in the field, so let's remove all the code that catered to it.  Aside
from removing a lot of boilerplate variant queries, this allows us to not
have to cope with servers that don't have (a) schemas or (b) pg_depend.
That means we can get rid of assorted squishy code around that.  There
may be some nonobvious additional simplifications possible, but this patch
already removes about 1500 lines of code.

I did not remove the ability for pg_restore to read custom-format archives
generated by these old versions (and light testing says that that does
still work).  If you have an old server, you probably also have a pg_dump
that will work with it; but you have an old custom-format backup file,
that might be all you have.

It'd be possible at this point to remove fmtQualifiedId()'s version
argument, but I refrained since that would affect code outside pg_dump.

Discussion: <2661.1475849167@sss.pgh.pa.us>
2016-10-12 12:20:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
e34318725c Improve documentation for CREATE RECURSIVE VIEW.
It was perhaps not entirely clear that internal self-references shouldn't
be schema-qualified even if the view name is written with a schema.
Spell it out.

Discussion: <871sznz69m.fsf@metapensiero.it>
2016-10-11 10:08:45 -04:00
Tom Lane
e8bdee2770 Add ALTER EXTENSION ADD/DROP ACCESS METHOD, and use it in pg_upgrade.
Without this, an extension containing an access method is not properly
dumped/restored during pg_upgrade --- the AM ends up not being a member
of the extension after upgrading.

Another oversight in commit 473b93287, reported by Andrew Dunstan.

Report: <f7ac29f3-515c-2a44-21c5-ec925053265f@dunslane.net>
2016-10-02 14:31:28 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6ed2d8584c pg_basebackup: Add --nosync option
This is useful for testing, similar to initdb's --nosync.

From: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2016-09-29 12:00:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6ad8ac6026 Exclude additional directories in pg_basebackup
The list of files and directories that pg_basebackup excludes from the
backup was somewhat incomplete and unorganized.  Change that with having
the exclusion driven from tables.  Clean up some code around it.  Also
document the exclusions in more detail so that users of pg_start_backup
can make use of it as well.

The contents of these directories are now excluded from the backup:
pg_dynshmem, pg_notify, pg_serial, pg_snapshots, pg_subtrans

Also fix a bug that a pg_repl_slot or pg_stat_tmp being a symlink would
cause a corrupt tar header to be created.  Now such symlinks are
included in the backup as empty directories.  Bug found by Ashutosh
Sharma <ashu.coek88@gmail.com>.

From: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2016-09-28 12:00:00 -04:00
Tom Lane
fdc9186f7e Replace the built-in GIN array opclasses with a single polymorphic opclass.
We had thirty different GIN array opclasses sharing the same operators and
support functions.  That still didn't cover all the built-in types, nor
did it cover arrays of extension-added types.  What we want is a single
polymorphic opclass for "anyarray".  There were two missing features needed
to make this possible:

1. We have to be able to declare the index storage type as ANYELEMENT
when the opclass is declared to index ANYARRAY.  This just takes a few
more lines in index_create().  Although this currently seems of use only
for GIN, there's no reason to make index_create() restrict it to that.

2. We have to be able to identify the proper GIN compare function for
the index storage type.  This patch proceeds by making the compare function
optional in GIN opclass definitions, and specifying that the default btree
comparison function for the index storage type will be looked up when the
opclass omits it.  Again, that seems pretty generically useful.

Since the comparison function lookup is done in initGinState(), making
use of the second feature adds an additional cache lookup to GIN index
access setup.  It seems unlikely that that would be very noticeable given
the other costs involved, but maybe at some point we should consider
making GinState data persist longer than it now does --- we could keep it
in the index relcache entry, perhaps.

Rather fortuitously, we don't seem to need to do anything to get this
change to play nice with dump/reload or pg_upgrade scenarios: the new
opclass definition is automatically selected to replace existing index
definitions, and the on-disk data remains compatible.  Also, if a user has
created a custom opclass definition for a non-builtin type, this doesn't
break that, since CREATE INDEX will prefer an exact match to opcintype
over a match to ANYARRAY.  However, if there's anyone out there with
handwritten DDL that explicitly specifies _bool_ops or one of the other
replaced opclass names, they'll need to adjust that.

Tom Lane, reviewed by Enrique Meneses

Discussion: <14436.1470940379@sss.pgh.pa.us>
2016-09-26 14:52:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e7010ce479 pg_ctl: Add wait option to promote action
When waiting is selected for the promote action, look into pg_control
until the state changes, then use the PQping-based waiting until the
server is reachable.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2016-09-21 12:00:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
46b55e7f85 pg_restore: Add -N option to exclude schemas
This is similar to the -N option in pg_dump, except that it doesn't take
a pattern, just like the existing -n option in pg_restore.

From: Michael Banck <michael.banck@credativ.de>
2016-09-20 12:00:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
4f6494cfd2 doc: Correct ALTER USER MAPPING example
The existing example threw an error.

From: gabrielle <gorthx@gmail.com>
2016-09-20 12:00:00 -04:00
Robert Haas
5225c66336 Clarify policy on marking inherited constraints as valid.
Amit Langote and Robert Haas
2016-09-15 17:24:54 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
9083353b15 pg_basebackup: Clean created directories on failure
Like initdb, clean up created data and xlog directories, unless the new
-n/--noclean option is specified.

Tablespace directories are not cleaned up, but a message is written
about that.

Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
2016-09-12 12:00:00 -04:00
Simon Riggs
f66472428a Correct TABLESAMPLE docs
Revert to original use of word “sample”, though with clarification,
per Tom Lane.

Discussion: 29052.1471015383@sss.pgh.pa.us
2016-09-09 11:19:21 +01:00
Tom Lane
0ab9c56d0f Support renaming an existing value of an enum type.
Not much to be said about this patch: it does what it says on the tin.

In passing, rename AlterEnumStmt.skipIfExists to skipIfNewValExists
to clarify what it actually does.  In the discussion of this patch
we considered supporting other similar options, such as IF EXISTS
on the type as a whole or IF NOT EXISTS on the target name.  This
patch doesn't actually add any such feature, but it might happen later.

Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker, reviewed by Emre Hasegeli

Discussion: <CAO=2mx6uvgPaPDf-rHqG8=1MZnGyVDMQeh8zS4euRyyg4D35OQ@mail.gmail.com>
2016-09-07 16:11:56 -04:00
Tom Lane
bd180b6079 Doc: minor documentation improvements about extensions.
Document the formerly-undocumented behavior that schema and comment
control-file entries for an extension are honored only during initial
installation, whereas other properties are also honored during updates.

While at it, do some copy-editing on the recently-added docs for CREATE
EXTENSION ... CASCADE, use links for some formerly vague cross references,
and make a couple other minor improvements.

Back-patch to 9.6 where CASCADE was added.  The other parts of this
could go further back, but they're probably not important enough to
bother.
2016-09-07 13:36:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
15bc038f9b Relax transactional restrictions on ALTER TYPE ... ADD VALUE.
To prevent possibly breaking indexes on enum columns, we must keep
uncommitted enum values from getting stored in tables, unless we
can be sure that any such column is new in the current transaction.

Formerly, we enforced this by disallowing ALTER TYPE ... ADD VALUE
from being executed at all in a transaction block, unless the target
enum type had been created in the current transaction.  This patch
removes that restriction, and instead insists that an uncommitted enum
value can't be referenced unless it belongs to an enum type created
in the same transaction as the value.  Per discussion, this should be
a bit less onerous.  It does require each function that could possibly
return a new enum value to SQL operations to check this restriction,
but there aren't so many of those that this seems unmaintainable.

Andrew Dunstan and Tom Lane

Discussion: <4075.1459088427@sss.pgh.pa.us>
2016-09-05 12:59:55 -04:00
Tom Lane
6591f4226c Improve readability of the output of psql's \timing command.
In addition to the existing decimal-milliseconds output value,
display the same value in mm:ss.fff format if it exceeds one second.
Tack on hours and even days fields if the interval is large enough.
This avoids needing mental arithmetic to convert the values into
customary time units.

Corey Huinker, reviewed by Gerdan Santos; bikeshedding by many

Discussion: <CADkLM=dbC4R8sbbuFXQVBFWoJGQkTEW8RWnC0PbW9nZsovZpJQ@mail.gmail.com>
2016-09-03 15:29:03 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ca9cb940d2 doc: more replacement of <literal> with something better
Reported-by: Alexander Law

Author: Alexander Law

Backpatch-through: 9.6
2016-08-24 21:11:44 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ff066481b0 doc: fix incorrect 'literal' tags
Discussion: dcc4113d-1eda-4f60-d1c5-f50eee160bad@gmail.com

Author: Alexander Law <exclusion@gmail.com>

Backpatch-through: 9.6
2016-08-23 12:45:36 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6391666411 doc: Remove some confusion from pg_archivecleanup doc
From: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2016-08-16 15:33:52 -04:00
Tom Lane
9b002cc9fe Doc: copy-editing in create_access_method.sgml.
Improve shaky English grammar.  And markup.
2016-08-16 11:35:36 -04:00
Tom Lane
4997878193 Doc: clarify that DROP ... CASCADE is recursive.
Apparently that's not obvious to everybody, so let's belabor the point.

In passing, document that DROP POLICY has CASCADE/RESTRICT options (which
it does, per gram.y) but they do nothing (I assume, anyway).  Also update
some long-obsolete commentary in gram.y.

Discussion: <20160805104837.1412.84915@wrigleys.postgresql.org>
2016-08-12 18:45:18 -04:00
Simon Riggs
6e75559ea9 Correct TABLESAMPLE docs
Original wording was correct but not the intended meaning.

Reported by Patrik Wenger
2016-08-12 10:34:43 +01:00
Tom Lane
e775d35317 Doc: clarify description of CREATE/ALTER FUNCTION ... SET FROM CURRENT.
Per discussion with David Johnston.
2016-08-09 13:39:24 -04:00
Noah Misch
9d924e9a64 Introduce a psql "\connect -reuse-previous=on|off" option.
The decision to reuse values of parameters from a previous connection
has been based on whether the new target is a conninfo string.  Add this
means of overriding that default.  This feature arose as one component
of a fix for security vulnerabilities in pg_dump, pg_dumpall, and
pg_upgrade, so back-patch to 9.1 (all supported versions).  In 9.3 and
later, comment paragraphs that required update had already-incorrect
claims about behavior when no connection is open; fix those problems.

Security: CVE-2016-5424
2016-08-08 10:07:46 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
4a1f42f287 doc: Move mention of rsync of temp tables to better place 2016-08-07 21:27:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4eb4b3f245 docs: mention rsync of temp and unlogged tables
This happens when using rsync to pg_upgrade slaves.

Reported-by: Jerry Sievers

Discussion: 20160726161946.GA3511@momjian.us
2016-08-04 18:55:36 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
81568a971f doc: Move indexterms to avoid whitespace issue in man pages 2016-08-03 17:02:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
69bdfc4090 doc: Change recommendation to put NOTIFY into a rule
Suggest a statement trigger instead.
2016-08-03 12:29:15 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e9888c2a48 doc: Whitespace fixes in man pages 2016-08-02 12:35:35 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
878bd9accb pg_rewind docs: clarify handling of remote servers 2016-08-01 12:52:22 -04:00
Fujii Masao
74d8c95b74 Fix pg_basebackup so that it accepts 0 as a valid compression level.
The help message for pg_basebackup specifies that the numbers 0 through 9
are accepted as valid values of -Z option. But, previously -Z 0 was rejected
as an invalid compression level.

Per discussion, it's better to make pg_basebackup treat 0 as valid
compression level meaning no compression, like pg_dump.

Back-patch to all supported versions.

Reported-By: Jeff Janes
Reviewed-By: Amit Kapila
Discussion: CAMkU=1x+GwjSayc57v6w87ij6iRGFWt=hVfM0B64b1_bPVKRqg@mail.gmail.com
2016-08-01 17:36:14 +09:00
Tom Lane
11653cd87f Doc: remove claim that hash index creation depends on effective_cache_size.
This text was added by commit ff213239c, and not long thereafter obsoleted
by commit 4adc2f72a (which made the test depend on NBuffers instead); but
nobody noticed the need for an update.  Commit 9563d5b5e adds some further
dependency on maintenance_work_mem, but the existing verbiage seems to
cover that with about as much precision as we really want here.  Let's
just take it all out rather than leaving ourselves open to more errors of
omission in future.  (That solution makes this change back-patchable, too.)

Noted by Peter Geoghegan.

Discussion: <CAM3SWZRVANbj9GA9j40fAwheQCZQtSwqTN1GBTVwRrRbmSf7cg@mail.gmail.com>
2016-07-31 18:32:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9e765bb10f pgbench docs: fix incorrect "last two" fields text
Reported-by: Alexander Law

Discussion: 5786638C.8080508@gmail.com

Backpatch-through: 9.4
2016-07-30 16:59:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5676da2d01 Documentation spell checking and markup improvements 2016-07-28 22:46:15 -04:00
Tom Lane
46b773d4fe Improve documentation about CREATE TABLE ... LIKE.
The docs failed to explain that LIKE INCLUDING INDEXES would not preserve
the names of indexes and associated constraints.  Also, it wasn't mentioned
that EXCLUDE constraints would be copied by this option.  The latter
oversight seems enough of a documentation bug to justify back-patching.

In passing, do some minor copy-editing in the same area, and add an entry
for LIKE under "Compatibility", since it's not exactly a faithful
implementation of the standard's feature.

Discussion: <20160728151154.AABE64016B@smtp.hushmail.com>
2016-07-28 13:26:58 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
094ea692ee Fix typos
Alexander Law
2016-07-20 10:39:18 +02:00
Tom Lane
ce150e7e0f Improve documentation about search_path for SECURITY DEFINER functions.
Clarify that the reason for recommending that pg_temp be put last is to
prevent temporary tables from capturing unqualified table names.  Per
discussion with Albe Laurenz.

Discussion: <A737B7A37273E048B164557ADEF4A58B5386C6E1@ntex2010i.host.magwien.gv.at>
2016-07-15 10:58:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
3aed52a622 doc: Fix typos
From: Alexander Law <exclusion@gmail.com>
2016-07-14 22:28:58 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
b9fc9f7c3c Put some things in a better order in psql help 2016-07-12 18:11:45 -04:00
Tom Lane
a670c24c38 Improve output of psql's \df+ command.
Add display of proparallel (parallel-safety) when the server is >= 9.6,
and display of proacl (access privileges) for all server versions.
Minor tweak of column ordering to keep related columns together.

Michael Paquier

Discussion: <CAB7nPqTR3Vu3xKOZOYqSm-+bSZV0kqgeGAXD6w5GLbkbfd5Q6w@mail.gmail.com>
2016-07-11 12:35:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
8ba4ccda45 Docs: improve examples about not repeating table name in UPDATE ... SET.
Alexander Law
2016-07-08 12:46:04 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
9b7bb106e0 doc: Fix option order in man pages and fix typos 2016-07-06 21:09:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8a395e0b9a doc: add link for list-of-scalars mention
Reported-by: Manlio Perillo

Bug: 14016

Discussion: 20160311163928.6674.94707@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston
2016-06-28 16:16:06 -04:00
Tom Lane
2d673424fa Improve user-facing documentation for partial/parallel aggregation.
Add a section to xaggr.sgml, as we have done in the past for other
extensions to the aggregation functionality.  Assorted wordsmithing
and other minor improvements.

David Rowley and Tom Lane
2016-06-22 19:14:16 -04:00
Tom Lane
f8ace5477e Fix type-safety problem with parallel aggregate serial/deserialization.
The original specification for this called for the deserialization function
to have signature "deserialize(serialtype) returns transtype", which is a
security violation if transtype is INTERNAL (which it always would be in
practice) and serialtype is not (which ditto).  The patch blithely overrode
the opr_sanity check for that, which was sloppy-enough work in itself,
but the indisputable reason this cannot be allowed to stand is that CREATE
FUNCTION will reject such a signature and thus it'd be impossible for
extensions to create parallelizable aggregates.

The minimum fix to make the signature type-safe is to add a second, dummy
argument of type INTERNAL.  But to lock it down a bit more and make misuse
of INTERNAL-accepting functions less likely, let's get rid of the ability
to specify a "serialtype" for an aggregate and just say that the only
useful serialtype is BYTEA --- which, in practice, is the only interesting
value anyway, due to the usefulness of the send/recv infrastructure for
this purpose.  That means we only have to allow "serialize(internal)
returns bytea" and "deserialize(bytea, internal) returns internal" as
the signatures for these support functions.

In passing fix bogus signature of int4_avg_combine, which I found thanks
to adding an opr_sanity check on combinefunc signatures.

catversion bump due to removing pg_aggregate.aggserialtype and adjusting
signatures of assorted built-in functions.

David Rowley and Tom Lane

Discussion: <27247.1466185504@sss.pgh.pa.us>
2016-06-22 16:52:41 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
3557b1791b docs: clarify use of pg_rewind arguments
Specifically, --source-pgdata and --source-server.

Discussion: 20160617155108.GC19359@momjian.us

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
2016-06-20 11:09:21 -04:00
Tom Lane
705ad7f3b5 Docs: improve description of psql's %R prompt escape sequence.
Dilian Palauzov pointed out in bug #14201 that the docs failed to mention
the possibility of %R producing '(' due to an unmatched parenthesis.

He proposed just adding that in the same style as the other options were
listed; but it seemed to me that the sentence was already nearly
unintelligible, so I rewrote it a bit more extensively.

Report: <20160619121113.5789.68274@wrigleys.postgresql.org>
2016-06-19 13:11:40 -04:00
Robert Haas
ede62e56fb Add VACUUM (DISABLE_PAGE_SKIPPING) for emergencies.
If you really want to vacuum every single page in the relation,
regardless of apparent visibility status or anything else, you can use
this option.  In previous releases, this behavior could be achieved
using VACUUM (FREEZE), but because we can now recognize all-frozen
pages as not needing to be frozen again, that no longer works.  There
should be no need for routine use of this option, but maybe bugs or
disaster recovery will necessitate its use.

Patch by me, reviewed by Andres Freund.
2016-06-17 15:48:57 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
fab9d1da4a document when PREPARE uses generic plans
Also explain how generic plans are created.
Link to PREPARE docs from wire-protocol prepare docs.

Reported-by: Jonathan Rogers

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/561E749D.4090301%40socialserve.com
2016-06-14 16:11:48 -04:00
Robert Haas
c9ce4a1c61 Eliminate "parallel degree" terminology.
This terminology provoked widespread complaints.  So, instead, rename
the GUC max_parallel_degree to max_parallel_workers_per_gather
(leaving room for a possible future GUC max_parallel_workers that acts
as a system-wide limit), and rename the parallel_degree reloption to
parallel_workers.  Rename structure members to match.

These changes create a dump/restore hazard for users of PostgreSQL
9.6beta1 who have set the reloption (or applied the GUC using ALTER
USER or ALTER DATABASE).
2016-06-09 10:00:26 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
a6dacf6bbb Fix thinko in description of table_name parameter
Commit 6820094d1 mixed up types of parent object (table) with type of
sub-object being commented on.  Noticed while fixing docs for
COMMENT ON ACCESS METHOD.

Backpatch to 9.5, like that commit.
2016-06-07 18:18:26 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
4f04b66f97 Fix loose ends for SQL ACCESS METHOD objects
COMMENT ON ACCESS METHOD was missing; add it, along psql tab-completion
support for it.

psql was also missing a way to list existing access methods; the new \dA
command does that.

Also add tab-completion support for DROP ACCESS METHOD.

Author: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqTzdZdu8J7EF8SXr_R2U5bSUUYNOT3oAWBZdEoggnwhGA@mail.gmail.com
2016-06-07 17:59:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
552346c550 doc: Refer to table by id 2016-06-07 10:41:20 -04:00
Greg Stark
e1623c3959 Fix various common mispellings.
Mostly these are just comments but there are a few in documentation
and a handful in code and tests. Hopefully this doesn't cause too much
unnecessary pain for backpatching. I relented from some of the most
common like "thru" for that reason. The rest don't seem numerous
enough to cause problems.

Thanks to Kevin Lyda's tool https://pypi.python.org/pypi/misspellings
2016-06-03 16:08:45 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
aa14bc41d1 Fix whitespace 2016-05-31 13:56:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
6d69ea3318 Fix typo in CREATE DATABASE syntax synopsis.
Misplaced "]", evidently a thinko in commit 213335c14.
2016-05-31 12:05:22 -04:00
Tom Lane
c45fb43c84 Docs: mention pg_reload_conf() in ALTER SYSTEM reference page.
Takayuki Tsunakawa

Discussion: <0A3221C70F24FB45833433255569204D1F578FC3@G01JPEXMBYT05>
2016-05-24 14:04:29 -04:00
Tom Lane
50e5315a58 Further improve documentation about --quote-all-identifiers switch.
Mention it in the Notes section too, per suggestion from David Johnston.

Discussion: <20160520165824.22598.31426@wrigleys.postgresql.org>
2016-05-20 15:51:57 -04:00
Tom Lane
960be4a998 Improve documentation about pg_dump's --quote-all-identifiers switch.
Per bug #14152 from Alejandro Martínez.  Back-patch to all supported
branches.

Discussion: <20160520165824.22598.31426@wrigleys.postgresql.org>
2016-05-20 14:59:47 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
122b99478a doc: Small wording change for clarity
From: Martín Marqués <martin@2ndquadrant.com>
2016-05-12 08:32:12 -04:00
Tom Lane
691d99de38 Docs: improve warnings about nextval() not producing gapless sequences.
In the documentation for nextval(), point out explicitly that INSERT ...
ON CONFLICT will call nextval() if needed for the insertion case, whether
or not it ends up following the ON CONFLICT path.  This seems to be a
matter of some confusion, cf bug #14126, so let's be clear about it.

Also mention the issue in the CREATE SEQUENCE reference page, since that
is another place where people might expect such things to be covered.

Minor wording improvements nearby, as well.

Back-patch to 9.5 where ON CONFLICT was introduced.
2016-05-07 13:16:50 -04:00
Tom Lane
bbbae5ead3 Docs: fix alphabetization of table entries.
Fabien Coelho
2016-05-06 17:48:56 -04:00
Tom Lane
daa9856fce Docs: fix \crosstabview example.
This example missed being updated when we redefined \crosstabview's
argument processing.

Daniel Vérité
2016-05-06 10:39:35 -04:00
Tom Lane
7a622b2731 Rename pgbench min/max to least/greatest, and fix handling of double args.
These functions behave like the backend's least/greatest functions,
not like min/max, so the originally-chosen names invite confusion.
Per discussion, rename to least/greatest.

I also took it upon myself to make them return double if any input is
double.  The previous behavior of silently coercing all inputs to int
surely does not meet the principle of least astonishment.

Copy-edit some of the other new functions' documentation, too.
2016-05-05 14:51:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6535bf3998 doc: Fix more typos
From: Alexander Law <exclusion@gmail.com>
2016-05-04 14:07:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
b87b2f4bda doc: Fix typos
From: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
2016-04-23 14:48:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
6f0d6a5078 Rethink \crosstabview's argument parsing logic.
\crosstabview interpreted its arguments in an unusual way, including
doing case-insensitive matching of unquoted column names, which is
surely not the right thing.  Rip that out in favor of doing something
equivalent to the dequoting/case-folding rules used by other psql
commands.  To keep it simple, change the syntax so that the optional
sort column is specified as a separate argument, instead of the
also-quite-unusual syntax that attached it to the colH argument with
a colon.

Also, rework the error messages to be closer to project style.
2016-04-14 22:54:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
85e0047077 Improve documentation for \crosstabview.
Fix misleading syntax summary (there cannot be a space between colH and
scolH).  Provide a link from the existing crosstab() function's
documentation to \crosstabview.  Copy-edit the command's description.

Christoph Berg and Tom Lane
2016-04-13 11:49:47 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
1ff3f420d4 Move \crosstabview regression tests to a separate file
It cannot run in the same parallel group as misc, because it creates a
table which is unpredictably visible in that test.

Per buildfarm member crake.
2016-04-08 23:42:24 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
c09b18f21c Support \crosstabview in psql
\crosstabview is a completely different way to display results from a
query: instead of a vertical display of rows, the data values are placed
in a grid where the column and row headers come from the data itself,
similar to a spreadsheet.

The sort order of the horizontal header can be specified by using
another column in the query, and the vertical header determines its
ordering from the order in which they appear in the query.

This only allows displaying a single value in each cell.  If more than
one value correspond to the same cell, an error is thrown.  Merging of
values can be done in the query itself, if necessary.  This may be
revisited in the future.

Author: Daniel Verité
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule, Dean Rasheed
2016-04-08 20:23:18 -03:00
Stephen Frost
293007898d Reserve the "pg_" namespace for roles
This will prevent users from creating roles which begin with "pg_" and
will check for those roles before allowing an upgrade using pg_upgrade.

This will allow for default roles to be provided at initdb time.

Reviews by José Luis Tallón and Robert Haas
2016-04-08 16:56:27 -04:00
Teodor Sigaev
8b99edefca Revert CREATE INDEX ... INCLUDING ...
It's not ready yet, revert two commits
690c543550 - unstable test output
386e3d7609 - patch itself
2016-04-08 21:52:13 +03:00
Teodor Sigaev
386e3d7609 CREATE INDEX ... INCLUDING (column[, ...])
Now indexes (but only B-tree for now) can contain "extra" column(s) which
doesn't participate in index structure, they are just stored in leaf
tuples. It allows to use index only scan by using single index instead
of two or more indexes.

Author: Anastasia Lubennikova with minor editorializing by me
Reviewers: David Rowley, Peter Geoghegan, Jeff Janes
2016-04-08 19:45:59 +03:00
Robert Haas
25fe8b5f1a Add a 'parallel_degree' reloption.
The code that estimates what parallel degree should be uesd for the
scan of a relation is currently rather stupid, so add a parallel_degree
reloption that can be used to override the planner's rather limited
judgement.

Julien Rouhaud, reviewed by David Rowley, James Sewell, Amit Kapila,
and me.  Some further hacking by me.
2016-04-08 11:14:56 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
2143f5e127 Fix broken ALTER INDEX documentation
Commit b8a91d9d1c put the description of the new IF EXISTS clause in the
wrong place -- move it where it belongs.

Backpatch to 9.2.
2016-04-05 19:03:42 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
f2fcad27d5 Support ALTER THING .. DEPENDS ON EXTENSION
This introduces a new dependency type which marks an object as depending
on an extension, such that if the extension is dropped, the object
automatically goes away; and also, if the database is dumped, the object
is included in the dump output.  Currently the grammar supports this for
indexes, triggers, materialized views and functions only, although the
utility code is generic so adding support for more object types is a
matter of touching the parser rules only.

Author: Abhijit Menon-Sen
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20160115062649.GA5068@toroid.org
2016-04-05 18:38:54 -03:00
Robert Haas
41ea0c2376 Fix parallel-safety code for parallel aggregation.
has_parallel_hazard() was ignoring the proparallel markings for
aggregates, which is no good.  Fix that.  There was no way to mark
an aggregate as actually being parallel-safe, either, so add a
PARALLEL option to CREATE AGGREGATE.

Patch by me, reviewed by David Rowley.
2016-04-05 16:06:15 -04:00
Tom Lane
2bbe9112ae Add a \gexec command to psql for evaluation of computed queries.
\gexec executes the just-entered query, like \g, but instead of printing
the results it takes each field as a SQL command to send to the server.
Computing a series of queries to be executed is a fairly common thing,
but up to now you always had to resort to kluges like writing the queries
to a file and then inputting the file.  Now it can be done with no
intermediate step.

The implementation is fairly straightforward except for its interaction
with FETCH_COUNT.  ExecQueryUsingCursor isn't capable of being called
recursively, and even if it were, its need to create a transaction
block interferes unpleasantly with the desired behavior of \gexec after
a failure of a generated query (i.e., that it can continue).  Therefore,
disable use of ExecQueryUsingCursor when doing the master \gexec query.
We can still apply it to individual generated queries, however, and there
might be some value in doing so.

While testing this feature's interaction with single-step mode, I (tgl) was
led to conclude that SendQuery needs to recognize SIGINT (cancel_pressed)
as a negative response to the single-step prompt.  Perhaps that's a
back-patchable bug fix, but for now I just included it here.

Corey Huinker, reviewed by Jim Nasby, Daniel Vérité, and myself
2016-04-04 15:25:16 -04:00
Tom Lane
3cc38ca7d2 Add psql \errverbose command to see last server error at full verbosity.
Often, upon getting an unexpected error in psql, one's first wish is that
the verbosity setting had been higher; for example, to be able to see the
schema-name field or the server code location info.  Up to now the only way
has been to adjust the VERBOSITY variable and repeat the failing query.
That's a pain, and it doesn't work if the error isn't reproducible.

This commit adds a psql feature that redisplays the most recent server
error at full verbosity, without needing to make any variable changes or
re-execute the failed command.  We just need to hang onto the latest error
PGresult in case the user executes \errverbose, and then apply libpq's
new PQresultVerboseErrorMessage() function to it.  This will consume
some trivial amount of psql memory, but otherwise the cost when the
feature isn't used should be negligible.

Alex Shulgin, reviewed by Daniel Vérité, some improvements by me
2016-04-03 12:29:55 -04:00
Tom Lane
c3834ef9e8 Remove TZ environment-variable entry from postgres reference page.
The server hasn't paid attention to the TZ environment variable since
commit ca4af308c3, but that commit missed removing this documentation
reference, as did commit d883b916a9 which added the reference where
it now belongs (initdb).

Back-patch to 9.2 where the behavior changed.  Also back-patch
d883b916a9 as needed.

Matthew Somerville
2016-03-29 21:38:41 -04:00
Robert Haas
5fe5a2cee9 Allow aggregate transition states to be serialized and deserialized.
This is necessary infrastructure for supporting parallel aggregation
for aggregates whose transition type is "internal".  Such values
can't be passed between cooperating processes, because they are
just pointers.

David Rowley, reviewed by Tomas Vondra and by me.
2016-03-29 15:04:05 -04:00
Robert Haas
7f0a2c85fb Improve pgbench docs regarding per-transaction logging.
The old documentation didn't know about the new -b flag, only about -f.

Fabien Coelho
2016-03-29 14:07:55 -04:00
Robert Haas
d797bf7da2 Fix pgbench documentation error.
The description of what the per-transaction log file says for skipped
transactions is just plain wrong.

Report and patch by Tomas Vondra, reviewed by Fabien Coelho and
modified by me.
2016-03-29 13:50:10 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
a1c935d3b7 pgbench: allow a script weight of zero
This refines the previous weight range and allows a script to be "turned
off" by passing a zero weight, which is useful when scripting multiple
pgbench runs.

I did not apply the suggested warning when a script uses zero weight; we
use the principle elsewhere that if there's nothing to be done, do
nothing quietly.

Adjust docs accordingly.

Author: Jeff Janes, Fabien Coelho
2016-03-29 14:47:10 -03:00
Robert Haas
ad9566470b pgbench: Remove \setrandom.
You can now do the same thing via \set using the appropriate function,
either random(), random_gaussian(), or random_exponential(), depending
on the desired distribution.  This is not backward-compatible, but per
discussion, it's worth it to avoid having the old syntax hang around
forever.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Michael Paquier, and adjusted by me.
2016-03-29 12:08:49 -04:00
Robert Haas
86c43f4e22 pgbench: Support double constants and functions.
The new functions are pi(), random(), random_exponential(),
random_gaussian(), and sqrt().  I was worried that this would be
slower than before, but, if anything, it actually turns out to be
slightly faster, because we now express the built-in pgbench scripts
using fewer lines; each \setrandom can be merged into a subsequent
\set.

Fabien Coelho
2016-03-28 20:45:57 -04:00
Robert Haas
a596db332b Improve documentation for combine functions.
David Rowley
2016-03-24 12:59:18 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
473b932870 Support CREATE ACCESS METHOD
This enables external code to create access methods.  This is useful so
that extensions can add their own access methods which can be formally
tracked for dependencies, so that DROP operates correctly.  Also, having
explicit support makes pg_dump work correctly.

Currently only index AMs are supported, but we expect different types to
be added in the future.

Authors: Alexander Korotkov, Petr Jelínek
Reviewed-By: Teodor Sigaev, Petr Jelínek, Jim Nasby
Commitfest-URL: https://commitfest.postgresql.org/9/353/
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAPpHfdsXwZmojm6Dx+TJnpYk27kT4o7Ri6X_4OSWcByu1Rm+VA@mail.gmail.com
2016-03-23 23:01:35 -03:00
Tom Lane
dea2b5960a Improve header output from psql's \watch command.
Include the \pset title string if there is one, and shorten the prefab
part of the header to be "timestamp (every Ns)".  Per suggestion by
David Johnston.

Michael Paquier and Tom Lane
2016-03-21 18:18:13 -04:00
Tom Lane
68ab8e8ba4 SQL commands in pgbench scripts are now ended by semicolons, not newlines.
To allow multiline SQL commands in scripts, adopt the same rules psql uses
to decide what is the end of a SQL command, to wit, an unquoted semicolon
not encased in parentheses.  Do this by importing the same flex lexer that
psql uses, since coping with stuff like dollar-quoted literals is hard to
get right without going the full nine yards.

This makes use of the infrastructure added in commit 0ea9efbe9e to
support independently-written flex lexers scanning the same PsqlScanState
input-buffer data structure.  Since that infrastructure isn't very
friendly to ad-hoc parsing code such as strtok(), improve exprscan.l
so that it can parse either whitespace-separated words or expression
tokens, on demand, and rewrite pgbench.c's backslash-command parsing
code to always use the lexer to fetch tokens.

It's still the case that pgbench backslash commands extend to the end
of the line, no more and no less.  That could be changed in a fairly
localized way now, and there was some interest in doing so, but it
seems like material for a separate patch.

In passing, make some marginal cleanups in syntax error reporting,
const-ify a few data structures that could use it, and run some of
this code through pgindent.

I can't tell whether the MSVC build scripts need to be taught explicitly
about the changes here or not, but the buildfarm will soon tell us.

Kyotaro Horiguchi and Tom Lane
2016-03-20 12:58:51 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
7bafffea64 pgbench: Allow changing weights for scripts
Previously, all scripts had the same probability of being chosen when
multiple of them were specified via -b, -f, -N, -S.  With this commit,
-b and -f now search for an "@" in the script name and use the integer
found after it as the drawing probability for that script.

(One disadvantage is that if you have script whose names contain @, you
are now forced to specify "@1" at the end; otherwise the name's @ is
confused with a weight separator.  We don't expect many pgbench script
with @ in their names in the wild, so this shouldn't be too serious a
problem.)

While at it, rework the interface between addScript, process_file,
process_builtin, and findBuiltin.  It had gotten a bit out of hand with
recent commits.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Robert Haas, Álvaro Herrera, Michaël Paquier
Discussion: http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/alpine.DEB.2.10.1603160721240.1666@sto
2016-03-19 12:32:42 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
b555ed8102 Merge wal_level "archive" and "hot_standby" into new name "replica"
The distinction between "archive" and "hot_standby" existed only because
at the time "hot_standby" was added, there was some uncertainty about
stability.  This is now a long time ago.  We would like to move forward
with simplifying the replication configuration, but this distinction is
in the way, because a primary server cannot tell (without asking a
standby or predicting the future) which one of these would be the
appropriate level.

Pick a new name for the combined setting to make it clearer that it
covers all (non-logical) backup and replication uses.  The old values
are still accepted but are converted internally.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
2016-03-18 23:56:03 +01:00
Tom Lane
9118d03a8c When appropriate, postpone SELECT output expressions till after ORDER BY.
It is frequently useful for volatile, set-returning, or expensive functions
in a SELECT's targetlist to be postponed till after ORDER BY and LIMIT are
done.  Otherwise, the functions might be executed for every row of the
table despite the presence of LIMIT, and/or be executed in an unexpected
order.  For example, in
	SELECT x, nextval('seq') FROM tab ORDER BY x LIMIT 10;
it's probably desirable that the nextval() values are ordered the same
as x, and that nextval() is not run more than 10 times.

In the past, Postgres was inconsistent in this area: you would get the
desirable behavior if the ordering were performed via an indexscan, but
not if it had to be done by an explicit sort step.  Getting the desired
behavior reliably required contortions like
	SELECT x, nextval('seq')
	  FROM (SELECT x FROM tab ORDER BY x) ss LIMIT 10;

This patch conditionally postpones evaluation of pure-output target
expressions (that is, those that are not used as DISTINCT, ORDER BY, or
GROUP BY columns) so that they effectively occur after sorting, even if an
explicit sort step is necessary.  Volatile expressions and set-returning
expressions are always postponed, so as to provide consistent semantics.
Expensive expressions (costing more than 10 times typical operator cost,
which by default would include any user-defined function) are postponed
if there is a LIMIT or if there are expressions that must be postponed.

We could be more aggressive and postpone any nontrivial expression, but
there are costs associated with doing so: it requires an extra Result plan
node which adds some overhead, and postponement changes the volume of data
going through the sort step, perhaps for the worse.  Since we tend not to
have very good estimates of the output width of nontrivial expressions,
it's hard to have much confidence in our ability to predict whether
postponement would increase or decrease the cost of the sort; therefore
this patch doesn't attempt to make decisions conditionally on that.
Between these factors and a general desire not to change query behavior
when there's not a demonstrable benefit, it seems best to be conservative
about applying postponement.  We might tweak the decision rules in the
future, though.

Konstantin Knizhnik, heavily rewritten by me
2016-03-11 12:27:50 -05:00
Robert Haas
69ab7b9d6c psql: Don't automatically use expanded format when there's 1 column.
Andreas Karlsson and Robert Haas
2016-03-11 08:04:01 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
a3a8309d45 Document BRIN a bit more thoroughly
The chapter "Interfacing Extensions To Indexes" and CREATE OPERATOR
CLASS reference page were missed when BRIN was added.  We document
all our other index access methods there, so make sure BRIN complies.

Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reported-By: Julien Rouhaud, Tom Lane
Reviewed-By: Emre Hasegeli
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/56CF604E.9000303%40dalibo.com
Backpatch: 9.5, where BRIN was introduced
2016-03-10 13:15:08 -03:00
Simon Riggs
fcb4bfddb6 Reduce lock level for altering fillfactor
Fabrízio de Royes Mello and Simon Riggs
2016-03-10 12:07:33 +00:00
Peter Eisentraut
e19e4cf0be doc: Reorganize pg_resetxlog reference page
The pg_resetxlog reference page didn't have a proper options list, only
running text listing the options and some explanations of them.  This
might have worked when there were only a few options, but the list has
grown over the releases, and now it's hard to find an option and its
associated explanation.  So write out the options list as on other
reference pages.
2016-03-09 21:26:06 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
2b46259b46 Fix typos
Author: Guillaume Lelarge
2016-03-06 12:25:47 +01:00
Alvaro Herrera
d561f1caec pgbench: accept unambiguous builtin prefixes for -b
This makes it easier to use "-b se" instead of typing the full "-b
select-only".

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Michaël Paquier
2016-03-03 19:37:13 -03:00
Robert Haas
7e137f846d Extend pgbench's expression syntax to support a few built-in functions.
Fabien Coelho, reviewed mostly by Michael Paquier and me, but also by
Heikki Linnakangas, BeomYong Lee, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Oleksander
Shulgin, and Álvaro Herrera.
2016-03-01 13:08:30 -05:00
Tom Lane
a65313f28b Improve documentation about CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY.
Clarify the description of which transactions will block a CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY command from proceeding, and mention that the index might
still not be usable after CREATE INDEX completes.  (This happens if the
index build detected broken HOT chains, so that pg_index.indcheckxmin gets
set, and there are open old transactions preventing the xmin horizon from
advancing past the index's initial creation.  I didn't want to explain what
broken HOT chains are, though, so I omitted an explanation of exactly when
old transactions prevent the index from being used.)

Per discussion with Chris Travers.  Back-patch to all supported branches,
since the same text appears in all of them.
2016-02-16 13:43:25 -05:00
Noah Misch
2ffa869620 Accept pg_ctl timeout from the PGCTLTIMEOUT environment variable.
Many automated test suites call pg_ctl.  Buildfarm members axolotl,
hornet, mandrill, shearwater, sungazer and tern have failed when server
shutdown took longer than the pg_ctl default 60s timeout.  This addition
permits slow hosts to easily raise the timeout without us editing a
--timeout argument into every test suite pg_ctl call.  Back-patch to 9.1
(all supported versions) for the sake of automated testing.

Reviewed by Tom Lane.
2016-02-10 20:34:02 -05:00
Tom Lane
c477e84fe2 Improve documentation about PRIMARY KEY constraints.
Get rid of the false implication that PRIMARY KEY is exactly equivalent to
UNIQUE + NOT NULL.  That was more-or-less true at one time in our
implementation, but the standard doesn't say that, and we've grown various
features (many of them required by spec) that treat a pkey differently from
less-formal constraints.  Per recent discussion on pgsql-general.

I failed to resist the temptation to do some other wordsmithing in the
same area.
2016-02-07 16:02:44 -05:00
Tom Lane
5ef244a282 Simplify syntax diagram for REINDEX.
Since there currently is only one possible parenthesized option, namely
VERBOSE, it's a bit pointless to show it with "{ } [, ... ]".  The curly
braces are useless and therefore confusing, as seen in a recent question
from Karsten Hilbert.  Remove the extra decoration for the time being;
we can put it back when and if REINDEX grows some more options.
2016-02-04 13:58:40 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
1d0c3b3f8a pgbench: allow per-script statistics
Provide per-script statistical info (count of transactions executed
under that script, average latency for the whole script) after a
multi-script run, adding an intermediate level of detail to existing
global stats and per-command stats.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewer: Michaël Paquier, Álvaro Herrera
2016-02-01 15:55:33 +01:00
Robert Haas
80db1ca2d7 Add [NO]BYPASSRLS options to CREATE USER and ALTER USER docs.
Patch-by: Filip Rembiałkowski
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
Backpatch-through: 9.5
2016-01-28 09:33:09 -05:00
Fujii Masao
62e2ddd4ca Fix typos in comments and doc
overriden -> overridden

The misspelling in create_extension.sgml was introduced in b67aaf2,
so no need to backpatch.
2016-01-28 16:47:36 +09:00
Fujii Masao
7f46eaf035 Add gin_clean_pending_list function to clean up GIN pending list
This function cleans up the pending list of the GIN index by
moving entries in it to the main GIN data structure in bulk.
It returns the number of pages cleaned up from the pending list.

This function is useful, for example, when the pending list
needs to be cleaned up *quickly* to improve the performance of
the search using GIN index. VACUUM can do the same thing, too,
but it may take days to run on a large table.

Jeff Janes,
reviewed by Julien Rouhaud, Jaime Casanova, Alvaro Herrera and me.

Discussion: CAMkU=1x8zFkpfnozXyt40zmR3Ub_kHu58LtRmwHUKRgQss7=iQ@mail.gmail.com
2016-01-28 12:57:52 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
8bea3d2219 pgbench: improve multi-script support
Previously, it was possible to specify one or several custom scripts to
run, or only one of the builtin scripts.  With this patch it is also
possible to specify to run the builtin scripts multiple times, using the
new -b option.  Also, unify the code for both cases; this eases future
pgbench improvements.

Author: Fabien Coelho
Review: Michaël Paquier, Álvaro Herrera
2016-01-27 02:54:22 +01:00
Robert Haas
a7de3dc5c3 Support multi-stage aggregation.
Aggregate nodes now have two new modes: a "partial" mode where they
output the unfinalized transition state, and a "finalize" mode where
they accept unfinalized transition states rather than individual
values as input.

These new modes are not used anywhere yet, but they will be necessary
for parallel aggregation.  The infrastructure also figures to be
useful for cases where we want to aggregate local data and remote
data via the FDW interface, and want to bring back partial aggregates
from the remote side that can then be combined with locally generated
partial aggregates to produce the final value.  It may also be useful
even when neither FDWs nor parallelism are in play, as explained in
the comments in nodeAgg.c.

David Rowley and Simon Riggs, reviewed by KaiGai Kohei, Heikki
Linnakangas, Haribabu Kommi, and me.
2016-01-20 13:46:50 -05:00
Tom Lane
9ff60273e3 Fix assorted inconsistencies in GiST opclass support function declarations.
The conventions specified by the GiST SGML documentation were widely
ignored.  For example, the strategy-number argument for "consistent" and
"distance" functions is specified to be a smallint, but most of the
built-in support functions declared it as an integer, and for that matter
the core code passed it using Int32GetDatum not Int16GetDatum.  None of
that makes any real difference at runtime, but it's quite confusing for
newcomers to the code, and it makes it very hard to write an amvalidate()
function that checks support function signatures.  So let's try to instill
some consistency here.

Another similar issue is that the "query" argument is not of a single
well-defined type, but could have different types depending on the strategy
(corresponding to search operators with different righthand-side argument
types).  Some of the functions threw up their hands and declared the query
argument as being of "internal" type, which surely isn't right ("any" would
have been more appropriate); but the majority position seemed to be to
declare it as being of the indexed data type, corresponding to a search
operator with both input types the same.  So I've specified a convention
that that's what to do always.

Also, the result of the "union" support function actually must be of the
index's storage type, but the documentation suggested declaring it to
return "internal", and some of the functions followed that.  Standardize
on telling the truth, instead.

Similarly, standardize on declaring the "same" function's inputs as
being of the storage type, not "internal".

Also, somebody had forgotten to add the "recheck" argument to both
the documentation of the "distance" support function and all of their
SQL declarations, even though the C code was happily using that argument.
Clean that up too.

Fix up some other omissions in the docs too, such as documenting that
union's second input argument is vestigial.

So far as the errors in core function declarations go, we can just fix
pg_proc.h and bump catversion.  Adjusting the erroneous declarations in
contrib modules is more debatable: in principle any change in those
scripts should involve an extension version bump, which is a pain.
However, since these changes are purely cosmetic and make no functional
difference, I think we can get away without doing that.
2016-01-19 12:04:36 -05:00
Tatsuo Ishii
65681d08b4 Fix typo in create_transform.sgml. 2016-01-06 08:03:50 +09:00
Tom Lane
7debf36072 Docs: provide a concrete discussion and example for RLS race conditions.
Commit 43cd468cf0 added some wording to create_policy.sgml purporting
to warn users against a race condition of the sort that had been noted some
time ago by Peter Geoghegan.  However, that warning was far too vague to be
useful (or at least, I completely failed to grasp what it was on about).
Since the problem case occurs with a security design pattern that lots of
people are likely to try to use, we need to be as clear as possible about
it.  Provide a concrete example in the main-line docs in place of the
original warning.
2016-01-04 15:11:43 -05:00
Tom Lane
c1611db01f Do some copy-editing on the docs for row-level security.
Clarifications, markup improvements, corrections of misleading or
outright wrong statements.
2016-01-03 20:04:11 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
151c4ffe41 doc: pg_committs -> pg_commit_ts
Reported by: Alain Laporte (#13836)
2015-12-28 13:45:03 -03:00
Tom Lane
bee172fcd5 Docs typo fix.
Michael Paquier
2015-12-24 10:23:44 -05:00
Robert Haas
3c7042a7d7 pgbench: Change terminology from "threshold" to "parameter".
Per a recommendation from Tomas Vondra, it's more helpful to refer to
the value that determines how skewed a Gaussian or exponential
distribution is as a parameter rather than a threshold.

Since it's not quite too late to get this right in 9.5, where it was
introduced, back-patch this.  Most of the patch changes only comments
and documentation, but a few pgbench messages are altered to match.

Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Michael Paquier and by me.
2015-12-18 13:24:51 -05:00
Tom Lane
66d947b9d3 Adjust behavior of single-user -j mode for better initdb error reporting.
Previously, -j caused the entire input file to be read in and executed as
a single command string.  That's undesirable, not least because any error
causes the entire file to be regurgitated as the "failing query".  Some
experimentation suggests a better rule: end the command string when we see
a semicolon immediately followed by two newlines, ie, an empty line after
a query.  This serves nicely to break up the existing examples such as
information_schema.sql and system_views.sql.  A limitation is that it's
no longer possible to write such a sequence within a string literal or
multiline comment in a file meant to be read with -j; but there are no
instances of such a problem within the data currently used by initdb.
(If someone does make such a mistake in future, it'll be obvious because
they'll get an unterminated-literal or unterminated-comment syntax error.)
Other than that, there shouldn't be any negative consequences; you're not
forced to end statements that way, it's just a better idea in most cases.

In passing, remove src/include/tcop/tcopdebug.h, which is dead code
because it's not included anywhere, and hasn't been for more than
ten years.  One of the debug-support symbols it purported to describe
has been unreferenced for at least the same amount of time, and the
other is removed by this commit on the grounds that it was useless:
forcing -j mode all the time would have broken initdb.  The lack of
complaints about that, or about the missing inclusion, shows that
no one has tried to use TCOP_DONTUSENEWLINE in many years.
2015-12-17 19:34:15 -05:00
Stephen Frost
43cd468cf0 Improve CREATE POLICY documentation
Clarify that SELECT policies are now applied when SELECT rights
are required for a given query, even if the query is an UPDATE or
DELETE query.  Pointed out by Noah.

Additionally, note the risk regarding concurrently open transactions
where a relation which controls access to the rows of another relation
are updated and the rows of the primary relation are also being
modified.  Pointed out by Peter Geoghegan.

Back-patch to 9.5.
2015-12-15 10:08:09 -05:00
Tom Lane
7bd149ce2a Docs: document that psql's "\i -" means read from stdin.
This has worked that way for a long time, maybe always, but you would
not have known it from the documentation.  Also back-patch the notes
I added to HEAD earlier today about behavior of the "-f -" switch,
which likewise have been valid for many releases.
2015-12-13 23:42:54 -05:00
Tom Lane
fcbbf82d2b Code and docs review for multiple -c and -f options in psql.
Commit d5563d7df9 drew complaints from Coverity, which quite
correctly complained that one copy of each -c or -f string was being
leaked.  What's more, simple_action_list_append was allocating enough space
for still a third copy of each string as part of the SimpleActionListCell,
even though that coding method had been superseded by a separate strdup
operation.  There were some other minor coding infelicities too.  The
documentation needed more work as well, eg it forgot to explain that -c
causes psql not to accept any interactive input.
2015-12-13 14:52:07 -05:00
Robert Haas
c00239ea6a Remove redundant sentence.
Peter Geoghegan
2015-12-09 14:11:58 -05:00
Robert Haas
d5563d7df9 psql: Support multiple -c and -f options, and allow mixing them.
To support this, we must reconcile some historical anomalies in the
behavior of -c.  In particular, as a backward-incompatibility, -c no
longer implies --no-psqlrc.

Pavel Stehule (code) and Catalin Iacob (documentation).  Review by
Michael Paquier and myself.  Proposed behavior per Tom Lane.
2015-12-08 14:04:08 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
f15b820a5c doc: Add serial comma 2015-12-03 10:24:16 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
9ff1a11a2d doc: Fix markup and improve placeholder names 2015-12-03 10:20:54 -05:00
Teodor Sigaev
e50cda7840 Use pg_rewind when target timeline was switched
Allow pg_rewind to work when target timeline was switched. Now
user can return promoted standby to old master.

Target timeline history becomes a global variable. Index
in target timeline history is used in function interfaces instead of
specifying TLI directly. Thus, SimpleXLogPageRead() can easily start
reading XLOGs from next timeline when current timeline ends.

Author: Alexander Korotkov
Review: Michael Paquier
2015-12-01 18:56:44 +03:00
Teodor Sigaev
92e38182d7 COPY (INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE .. RETURNING ..)
Attached is a patch for being able to do COPY (query) without a CTE.

Author: Marko Tiikkaja
Review: Michael Paquier
2015-11-27 19:11:22 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
cbd96eff25 doc: Some improvements on CREATE POLICY and ALTER POLICY documentation 2015-11-23 21:36:57 -05:00
Teodor Sigaev
d00352573a Clarify pg_rewind connection requirements.
Per http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/564C4CE6.9000509@postgrespro.ru
Pavel Luzanov <p.luzanov@postgrespro.ru>
2015-11-23 19:27:01 +03:00
Tom Lane
00cdd83521 Adopt the GNU convention for handling tar-archive members exceeding 8GB.
The POSIX standard for tar headers requires archive member sizes to be
printed in octal with at most 11 digits, limiting the representable file
size to 8GB.  However, GNU tar and apparently most other modern tars
support a convention in which oversized values can be stored in base-256,
allowing any practical file to be a tar member.  Adopt this convention
to remove two limitations:
* pg_dump with -Ft output format failed if the contents of any one table
exceeded 8GB.
* pg_basebackup failed if the data directory contained any file exceeding
8GB.  (This would be a fatal problem for installations configured with a
table segment size of 8GB or more, and it has also been seen to fail when
large core dump files exist in the data directory.)

File sizes under 8GB are still printed in octal, so that no compatibility
issues are created except in cases that would have failed entirely before.

In addition, this patch fixes several bugs in the same area:

* In 9.3 and later, we'd defined tarCreateHeader's file-size argument as
size_t, which meant that on 32-bit machines it would write a corrupt tar
header for file sizes between 4GB and 8GB, even though no error was raised.
This broke both "pg_dump -Ft" and pg_basebackup for such cases.

* pg_restore from a tar archive would fail on tables of size between 4GB
and 8GB, on machines where either "size_t" or "unsigned long" is 32 bits.
This happened even with an archive file not affected by the previous bug.

* pg_basebackup would fail if there were files of size between 4GB and 8GB,
even on 64-bit machines.

* In 9.3 and later, "pg_basebackup -Ft" failed entirely, for any file size,
on 64-bit big-endian machines.

In view of these potential data-loss bugs, back-patch to all supported
branches, even though removal of the documented 8GB limit might otherwise
be considered a new feature rather than a bug fix.
2015-11-21 20:21:31 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
db135e834a doc: Clarify some things on pg_receivexlog reference page 2015-11-19 14:26:44 -05:00
Andres Freund
edf68b2ed5 Improve ON CONFLICT documentation.
Author: Peter Geoghegan and Andres Freund
Discussion: CAM3SWZScpWzQ-7EJC77vwqzZ1GO8GNmURQ1QqDQ3wRn7AbW1Cg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 9.5, where ON CONFLICT was introduced
2015-11-19 01:37:58 +01:00
Tom Lane
6404751ce9 Improve documentation around autovacuum-related storage parameters.
These were discussed in three different sections of the manual, which
unsurprisingly had diverged over time; and the descriptions of individual
variables lacked stylistic consistency even within each section (and
frequently weren't in very good English anyway).  Clean up the mess, and
remove some of the redundant information in hopes that future additions
will be less likely to re-introduce inconsistency.  For instance I see
no need for maintenance.sgml to include its very own list of all the
autovacuum storage parameters, especially since that list was already
incomplete.
2015-11-11 17:13:38 -05:00
Tom Lane
a69b0b2c14 Code + docs review for unicode linestyle patch.
Fix some brain fade in commit a2dabf0e1d: erroneous variable names
in docs, rearrangements that made sentences less clear not more so,
undocumented and poorly-chosen-anyway API behaviors of subroutines,
bad grammar in error messages, copy-and-paste faults.

Albe Laurenz and Tom Lane
2015-11-03 11:49:21 -05:00
Robert Haas
c5057b2b34 doc: security_barrier option is a Boolean, not a string.
Mistake introduced by commit 5bd91e3a83.

Hari Babu
2015-10-30 12:19:28 +01:00
Tom Lane
d371bebd3d Remove redundant CREATEUSER/NOCREATEUSER options in CREATE ROLE et al.
Once upon a time we did not have a separate CREATEROLE privilege, and
CREATEUSER effectively meant SUPERUSER.  When we invented CREATEROLE
(in 8.1) we also added SUPERUSER so as to have a less confusing keyword
for this role property.  However, we left CREATEUSER in place as a
deprecated synonym for SUPERUSER, because of backwards-compatibility
concerns.  It's still there and is still confusing people, as for example
in bug #13694 from Justin Catterson.  9.6 will be ten years or so later,
which surely ought to be long enough to end the deprecation and just
remove these old keywords.  Hence, do so.
2015-10-22 09:34:03 -07:00
Robert Haas
1e35319861 Hyphenate variable-length for consistency.
We hyphenate "fixed-length" earlier in the same sentence, and overall we
more often use "variable-length" rather than "variable length".

Nikolay Shaplov
2015-10-08 12:29:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
1ea0c73c2b Improve documentation of the role-dropping process.
In general one may have to run both REASSIGN OWNED and DROP OWNED to get
rid of all the dependencies of a role to be dropped.  This was alluded to
in the REASSIGN OWNED man page, but not really spelled out in full; and in
any case the procedure ought to be documented in a more prominent place
than that.  Add a section to the "Database Roles" chapter explaining this,
and do a bit of wordsmithing in the relevant commands' man pages.
2015-10-07 16:12:05 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2145a76604 psql: allow \pset C in setting the title, matches \C
Report by David G. Johnston
2015-10-05 20:56:38 -04:00
Andres Freund
10cfd6f854 Remove outdated comment about relation level autovacuum freeze limits.
The documentation for the autovacuum_multixact_freeze_max_age and
autovacuum_freeze_max_age relation level parameters contained:
"Note that while you can set autovacuum_multixact_freeze_max_age very
small, or even zero, this is usually unwise since it will force frequent
vacuuming."
which hasn't been true since these options were made relation options,
instead of residing in the pg_autovacuum table (834a6da4f7).

Remove the outdated sentence. Even the lowered limits from 2596d70 are
high enough that this doesn't warrant calling out the risk in the CREATE
TABLE docs.

Per discussion with Tom Lane and Alvaro Herrera

Discussion: 26377.1443105453@sss.pgh.pa.us
Backpatch: 9.0- (in parts)
2015-10-05 16:51:03 +02:00
Stephen Frost
088c83363a ALTER TABLE .. FORCE ROW LEVEL SECURITY
To allow users to force RLS to always be applied, even for table owners,
add ALTER TABLE .. FORCE ROW LEVEL SECURITY.

row_security=off overrides FORCE ROW LEVEL SECURITY, to ensure pg_dump
output is complete (by default).

Also add SECURITY_NOFORCE_RLS context to avoid data corruption when
ALTER TABLE .. FORCE ROW SECURITY is being used. The
SECURITY_NOFORCE_RLS security context is used only during referential
integrity checks and is only considered in check_enable_rls() after we
have already checked that the current user is the owner of the relation
(which should always be the case during referential integrity checks).

Back-patch to 9.5 where RLS was added.
2015-10-04 21:05:08 -04:00
Noah Misch
3cb0a7e75a Make BYPASSRLS behave like superuser RLS bypass.
Specifically, make its effect independent from the row_security GUC, and
make it affect permission checks pertinent to views the BYPASSRLS role
owns.  The row_security GUC thereby ceases to change successful-query
behavior; it can only make a query fail with an error.  Back-patch to
9.5, where BYPASSRLS was introduced.
2015-10-03 20:19:57 -04:00
Andres Freund
b67aaf21e8 Add CASCADE support for CREATE EXTENSION.
Without CASCADE, if an extension has an unfullfilled dependency on
another extension, CREATE EXTENSION ERRORs out with "required extension
... is not installed". That is annoying, especially when that dependency
is an implementation detail of the extension, rather than something the
extension's user can make sense of.

In addition to CASCADE this also includes a small set of regression
tests around CREATE EXTENSION.

Author: Petr Jelinek, editorialized by Michael Paquier, Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Jeff Janes
Discussion: 557E0520.3040800@2ndquadrant.com
2015-10-03 18:23:40 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
eff091cc19 doc: Make some index terms and terminology more consistent 2015-10-02 21:22:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
84ae1af8f4 doc: Tweak synopsis indentation for consistency 2015-09-21 23:31:43 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
741ccd5015 Use gender-neutral language in documentation
Based on patch by Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@enterprisedb.com>, although
I rephrased most of the initial work.
2015-09-21 22:57:29 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
213335c145 Order some new options on man pages more sensibly, minor improvements 2015-09-17 20:57:47 -04:00
Robert Haas
7aea8e4f2d Determine whether it's safe to attempt a parallel plan for a query.
Commit 924bcf4f16 introduced a framework
for parallel computation in PostgreSQL that makes most but not all
built-in functions safe to execute in parallel mode.  In order to have
parallel query, we'll need to be able to determine whether that query
contains functions (either built-in or user-defined) that cannot be
safely executed in parallel mode.  This requires those functions to be
labeled, so this patch introduces an infrastructure for that.  Some
functions currently labeled as safe may need to be revised depending on
how pending issues related to heavyweight locking under paralllelism
are resolved.

Parallel plans can't be used except for the case where the query will
run to completion.  If portal execution were suspended, the parallel
mode restrictions would need to remain in effect during that time, but
that might make other queries fail.  Therefore, this patch introduces
a framework that enables consideration of parallel plans only when it
is known that the plan will be run to completion.  This probably needs
some refinement; for example, at bind time, we do not know whether a
query run via the extended protocol will be execution to completion or
run with a limited fetch count.  Having the client indicate its
intentions at bind time would constitute a wire protocol break.  Some
contexts in which parallel mode would be safe are not adjusted by this
patch; the default is not to try parallel plans except from call sites
that have been updated to say that such plans are OK.

This commit doesn't introduce any parallel paths or plans; it just
provides a way to determine whether they could potentially be used.
I'm committing it on the theory that the remaining parallel sequential
scan patches will also get committed to this release, hopefully in the
not-too-distant future.

Robert Haas and Amit Kapila.  Reviewed (in earlier versions) by Noah
Misch.
2015-09-16 15:38:47 -04:00
Teodor Sigaev
1def9063ca pgbench progress with timestamp
This patch adds an option to replace the "time since pgbench run
started" with a Unix epoch timestamp in the progress report so that,
for instance, it is easier to compare timelines with pgsql log

Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2015-09-16 17:24:53 +03:00
Stephen Frost
6820094d1a Add POLICY to COMMENT documentation
COMMENT supports POLICY but the documentation hadn't caught up with
that fact.

Patch by Charles Clavadetscher

Back-patch to 9.5 where POLICY was added.
2015-09-15 10:56:29 -04:00
Teodor Sigaev
d02426029b Check existency of table/schema for -t/-n option (pg_dump/pg_restore)
Patch provides command line option --strict-names which requires that at
least one table/schema should present for each -t/-n option.

Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
2015-09-14 16:19:49 +03:00
Stephen Frost
e7bf508e6b Fix typo in create_policy.sgml
WTIH -> WITH

Pointed out by Dmitriy Olshevskiy

Backpatch to 9.5 where create_policy.sgml was added.
2015-09-12 17:17:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
103ef20211 doc: Spell checking 2015-09-10 21:35:06 -04:00